Bhel Instrumentation g284r

DIVISION – D CONTROL AND INSTRUMENTATION VOLUME-D1 INSTRUMENTATION SCHEMES & SCHEDULES, SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS,LIST OF LT & SERVOMOTORS, DRUM LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION AND TAPPING POINT DETAILS, FSSS, SADC, SBC, EWLI, POWER CYLINDERS, LOCAL INSTRUMENT DETAIL LIST OF CONTENTS Location

Description

TAB-1

INSTRUMENTATION SCHEMES & SCHEDULES, SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS, LIST OF LT & SERVOMOTORS, DRUM LEVEL INSTRUMENTATION AND TAPPING POINT DETAILS

(1-80)

Ref. No./ Drg.No

Scheme of Air and Flue Gas Path with Instrumentation

0-97-288-90553

Scheme of Pulveriser System with Instrumentation

1-97-291-90237

Location of Thermocouples for SH & RH Metal temp.

0-97-293-90554

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Pulveriser System

4-97-288-91647

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Fuel Oil System

4-97-288-91645

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Water and Steam

4-97-288-91644

Recommended Write – up on Boiler Auto Controls Systems

M/s. BHEL

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Air & Flue Gas System

1-97-291-91646

Recommended Write – up on Interlocks and Protection for Boiler House Auxiliaries

M/s. BHEL

Recommended Write – up on Boiler Auto Controls Systems

4-97-096-91704 To 4-97-096-91719

Schedule of Dampers

4-97-599-91584

Schedule of LT Motors

4-97-599-91538

Schedule of Servomotors

4-97-599-91539

Drum Dished End Inst Tapping Details

4-97-287-91762

Physical Location of Tapping Points in Furnace Region

1-97-288-90247

Tappings Point Details Drawings

4-97-288-91545 To 4-97-288-91554

4006 – 4007 BATHINDA

VOLUME-D1

GO TO DIVISION INDEX

Page 1 of 3


Description

Ref. No./ Drg.No

TAB-2

FURNACE SAEGU ARD SUPERVISORY SUSTEM (FSSS)

(81-196)

TAB-3

Write – up on FSSS

M/s. BHEL

Basic Scope Diagram for FSSS

3-95-094-16217

List of Logic Drawings

3-95-094-16741 To 3-95-094-17013

FSSS Local Oil Gun Maintenance Switch Box

1-95-089-05320

Electrical Junction Box (with Brass Terminals)

1-95-091-10793

SECONDRY AIR DAMPER CONTROL SYSTEM (SADC)

(197-216)

Basic Scope Diagram for SADC

3-95-194-16219

SADC- System – List of Drawings

3-95-194-16845

To 3-95-194-16852 Write – up on SADC TAB-4

M/s. BHEL

SOOT BLOWER CONTROLS

(217-246)

Write – up on Soot Blower Control System

M/s. BHEL

Soot Blower MCC – List of Drawings

3-96-186-09596 To 3-96-186-09605

Interconnection Diagram for Soot Blower System

3-96-186-10502 To 3-96-186-10515


GO TO INDEX

VOLUME-D1


Page 2 of 3


Description

Ref. No./ Drg.No

TAB-5

ELECTRONIC WATER LEVELINDICATOR (EWLI)

(247-300)

TAB-6

Installation & Maintenance Manual (Version - II)

M/s. BHEL

Installation / Part Drawings

3-97-088-14787 To 3-97-088-14457

POWER CYLINDERS

(301-319)

TAB- 7

Data Sheet for Preumatic Actuator

M/s. BHEL

Terminal Block Wiring Diagram for Power Cylinder

4-97-599-11188

Instruction Manual for Power Cylinders

M/s. Instrumentation Limited

LOCAL INSTRUMENT DETAILS

(320-331)

Pulv. Lube Oil System Interconnection – List of Drawings


GO TO INDEX

VOLUME-D1


3-95-289-17066 To 3-95-289-17077

Page 3 of 3

TAB - 1

GO TO INDEX

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-1

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-2

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-3

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-4

GO TO INDEX

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

02 HFE60

001003

PT

PR. AT HOT PA HDR

HOT PY. AIR

3

1850 x 1850

768

800

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/ A,N,C

C C

32

33

34

35

REMARKS

800

31

REVISION

768

30

SCOPE

1850 x 1850

29

CABLE CONNECTION

1

28

INST_END_CONN

HOT PY. AIR

27

TAPPING POINT DETAIL/DRG.

PR. AT HOT PA HDR

26

MODEL

PP

25

MAKE

401

LINE SIZE

DESCRIPTION

01 HFE60

24

CONT. ACTION

23

UNIT_OF_SEC_INST

22

RANGE_OF SEC_INST

21

UNIT_ OF_PY_INST

20

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

19

BCR : 082

SET POINT

18

FUNCTION

17

INSULATION THICKNESS(mm)

16

MAX. VELOCITY(m/Sec.)

15

UNIT OF OTHERS

14

MAX. OTHERS.

13

OP. OTHERS.

12

MAX.TEMP

11

OP.TEMP

10

UNIT OF PRESS

9

MAX.PRESS

8

OP.PRESS

7

QTY / BOILER

6

MEDIUM

5

TYPE OF INST

4

TAG-3

SL.NO

3

TAG-2

2

TAG-1

1

UNIT OF TEMP.

MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PULVERISER SYSTEM

PROJECT : GTPS BATHINDA (R & M) CAPACITY : 2X120 MW UNITS # 3 & 4 CUSTOMER: PUNJAB STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD CUST NO : 4006 4007

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

--

mmW C

--

mmWC

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91550

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

01 Immediate Trip

03 HFE60

101103

PSLL

PR. AT HOT PA HDR

HOT PY. AIR

3

1850 x 1850

768

800

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

F/ N

500

260 to mmW 1100 C

--

--

COD

SOR INC

12RNEE614M4-C2ATTYYVVPKA7X

04 HFE60

104105

PSAL PR. AT HOT PA HDR

HOT PY. AIR

2

1850 x 1850

768

800

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

F/ A, N

520

100 to mmW 1000 C

--

--

COD

SWITZER INSTRUMEN T LTD

GM 20102-C4K55-Z

4-97-288-91550

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

01

05 HFE61-64

401

PP

PR. AT HOT PA SHUT OFF GATE

HOT PY. AIR

4

1300 x 1300

768

800

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

06 HFE61-64

402

PP

PR. AFTER HOT PA SHUT OFF GATE

HOT PY. AIR

4

1300 x 1300

768

800

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

693

725

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

693

725

mmWC

228

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

07 HFE61-64

CT

401

TP

TEMP AFTER HOT PA REG. DAMPER

HOT PY. AIR

4

1300 x 1300

08 HFE61-64

403

PP

PR. AFTR HOT PA REG. DMPR HOT PY. AIR

4

1300 x 1300

C

C

C C C C

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

-

00

--

T

--

--

--

--

mmWC

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-5

09 HFE50

401

PP

PR. AT COLD PA HDR

COLD PY. AIR

1

900 x 900

900

943

mmWC

35

55

O

10 HFE51-54

402

PP

PR. AFTR COLD PA GATE

COLD PY. AIR

4

650 x 650

693

725

mmWC

35

55

O

11 HFE51-54

403

PP

PR. AFTR COLD PA REG. DAMPER

COLD PY. AIR

4

650 x 650

693

725

mmWC

35

55

O

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

12 HFE61-64

CT

001003

TE

TEMP. - MXD AIR BFR MILL:A-E

HOT & COLD PY. AIR

12

1300 x 1300

668

696

mmWC

184

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I,C

--

--

C

--

13 HFE61-64

CF

001003

FT

FLOW - MXD AIR BFR MILL:A-E

HOT & COLD PY. AIR

12

1300 x 1300

668

696

mmWC

184

270

O

--

77.00

t/h

--

--

D/ I,C

--

--

mmW C

--

14 HFE61-64

001

PT

PR.- MXD AIR BFR MILL:A-E

HOT & COLD PY. AIR

4

1300 x 1300

668

696

mmWC

184

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

4

1300 x 1300

668

696

mmWC

184

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

4

1300 x 1300

668

696

mmWC

184

270

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

C C C C C

15 HFE61-64

404

PP

PR.- MXD AIR BFR MILL:A-E

HOT & COLD PY. AIR

16 HFE61-64

CT

402

TP

TEMP. - MXD AIR BFR MILL:A-E

HOT & COLD PY. AIR METAL

4

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

METAL

4

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

18 HFC01-04

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT MILL MTR:A-D NDE BRG

19 HFC01-04

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT MILL MTR:A-D NDE BRG

GO TO INDEX

T

C

C C C C

I

--

D/I,A,N T+5/T+10

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

t/h

--

--

--

--

--

E

00 FE by BHEL Trichy

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

O

--

--

OC

--

--

O

--

C

-O

C

-O

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

T=ACTUAL RUNNING 00 TEMP. OBSERVED

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

00

--

DRG NO.:4-97-288-91647/01 SHEET 2 OF 3

MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR PULVERISER SYSTEM

31

32

33

34

35

RANGE_OF SEC_INST

UNIT_OF_SEC_INST

REMARKS

30

REVISION

29

SCOPE

28

CABLE CONNECTION

27

INST_END_CONN

26


25

MODEL

24

MAKE

23

CONT. ACTION

22

UNIT_ OF_PY_INST

UNIT OF TEMP.

21

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

20

SET POINT

19

FUNCTION

18


17


16

UNIT OF OTHERS

15

MAX. OTHERS.

14

OP. OTHERS.

13

MAX.TEMP

12

OP.TEMP

11

UNIT OF PRESS

10

MAX.PRESS

9

OP.PRESS

8

LINE SIZE

7

QTY / BOILER

6

MEDIUM

5

DESCRIPTION

4

TYPE OF INST

TAG-1

3

TAG-3

2

BCR : 082

TAG-2

1

SL.NO


20 HFC01-04

CT

002013

TE

TEMP. AT MILL MTR:A-D WNDG METAL

48

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A,N T+5/T+10

--

O

--

O

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

00

--

21 HFC01-04

CT

014

TE

TEMP. AT MILL MTR:A-D DE BRG

4

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A,N T+5/T+10

--

O

--

O

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

00

--

METAL

C C

C C

C

22 HFC01-04

CT

502

TI

TEMP. AT MILL MTR:A-D DE BRG

METAL

4

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

I

--

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

00

--

24 HFC01-04

CT

503

TI

TEMP. AT MILL :A-D OIL BATH

LUBE OIL

4

--

--

--

--

T

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

I

--

--

O

C

--

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

H

00

--

25 HFC01-04

CT

015017

TE

TEMP. AT MILL:A-D O/L

AIR + COAL

12

--

307

384

mmWC

6690

90

O

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C,N

--

OC

--

OC

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

IS REQD FROM STN CI FOR FSSS

26 HFC01-04

101

AIR + COAL

4

--

307

384

mmWC

85

90

O

DP= 200

--

mmWC

--

--

F/N

50 to 1200

mmW C

--

--

COI


GM 30102-EIDDD-Z

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

01

RUN FEEDER SPEED TO MINIMUM

27 HFC01-04

001

PDT

DP ACROS MILL BOWL

AIR + COAL

4

--

307

384

mmWC

85

90

O

DP= 200

--

mmWC

--

--

F/N

--

mmW C

--

mmWC

--

--

--

--

--

E

00

RUN FEEDER SPEED TO MINIMUM

28 HFC01-04

401

PP

DP ACROS MILL BOWL

AIR + COAL

4

--

307

384

mmWC

85

90

O

--

--

mmWC

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

-

00

--

CT

018022

--

O

--

--

--

E

00

--

--

mmWC

--

T

01

--

--

T

LOCAL PNEUMATIC 00 CONTROLLER BY FS/PE(B)

29 HFC01-04

PDSH DP ACROSS MILL BOWL

TE

TEMP. AT MILL:A-D REJECT

COAL

20

--

--

--

--

T

C C

C

C

C

C C

--

D/AN

170

mmW C

--

--

--

LC

--

--

S

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

COI


GM 30102-EIDDD-Z

---

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

C

4-97-288-90486

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-6

--

mmWC

--

--

O

PR. AFTR DYNA FLTR O/L

SEAL AIR

1

--

754

--

mmWC

45

--

O

--

--

PR. AFTR DYNA FLTR O/L

SEAL AIR

1

--

754

--

mmWC

45

--

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

DP ACROS SEAL AIR HDR/COLD SEAL AIR / PA HDR COLD PA HDR

2

--

--

--

mmWC

--

--

O

DP= 400

--

mmWC

--

--

F/ N

100

50 to 1200

mmW C

--

PI

PR. AT SEAL AIR DIS.

SEAL AIR

1

NB 650

1260

--

mmWC

45

50

O

--

--

--

--

--

L/I

--

02000

mmW C

--

--

--

MONOMETE R(I)P.LTD

--

TP

TEMP. AT SEAL AIR DIS.

SEAL AIR

1

NB 650

1260

--

mmWC

45

50

O

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I

--

--

mmW C

--

mmWC

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

--

125*

50 to 1200

mmW C

501

PDC

32 HFW10

401

PP

33 HFW20

101102

PDSL

34 HFW20

501

35 HFW20

CT

401

PDAH PR.ACROSS DYNA FLTR

C

C

C

C

C

C

36 HFW20

401

PP


SEAL AIR

1

NB 650

1260

--

mmWC

45

50

O

37 HFW20

001

PT


SEAL AIR

1

NB 650

1260

--

mmWC

45

50

O

38 HFW21-24

401

PP

PR. AT SEAL AIR TO MILL :A-E DMPR

SEAL AIR

4

NB 250

1260

--

mmWC

45

50

O

--

--

O

DP= 250

102

-50 to 1200

--

D/I,A

--

31 HFW10

40 HFW21-24

--

1

101

101

--

O

SEAL AIR

--

O

DP= 150

30 HFW10

39 HFW21-24

--

300

C

PDSL

PDSH

DP ACROSS SEALAIR HDR / MILL:A-E UNDR BWL DP ACROSS SEALAIR HDR /MILL:A-E UNDR BWL

SEAL AIR

SEAL AIR

GO TO INDEX

4

4

--

--

--

--

--

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

--

--

C C C

C

O

C

DP= 250

--

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

--

--

--

F/ N

F/A,N

200^

50 to 1200

mmW C

SWITZER mmWC COD INSTRUMEN T LTD

--

--

-

00

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

01

---

---

--

T

01

--

---

--

--

-

00

--

GM 30102-EIDDD-Z

-changeover to the other seal air fan

--

--

-

00

--

SWITZER mmWC COD INSTRUMEN T LTD

GM 30102-EIDDD-Z

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

* Mill to Trip with the delay 01 of 1 Min.

--


GM 30102-EIDDD-Z

1/2" NPT-F

3/4" NPTF

T

01

mmWC COI

^ For Mill Startup Permissive

DRG NO.:4-97-288-91647/01 SHEET 3 OF 3

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-7

GO TO INDEX

2

3

HJF60

HJF60

CT

501

501

TI

PI

TEMP-OP FLR HFO

PR-OP.FLR HFO

HFO

1 NB 50

1 NB 50

19.5

19.5

Kg/cm 2

Kg/cm 2

o

ft

o

C

4

HJF61

101

PDSAH DP ACROS OP FLR STNR

HFO

1 NB 50

DP= 0.1

5

HJF62

101

PDSAH DP ACROS OP FLR STNR

HFO

1 NB 50

DP= 0.1

6

HJF63

501

HFO

1 NB 50

19

Kg/cm 2

ft

o

7

HJF63

101

HFO

1 NB 50

19

Kg/cm 2

ft

o

8

HJF63

CF

001

FM

FLOW - OP.FLR HFO

HFO

1 NB 50

19

Kg/cm 2

ft

o

8.6 to 1.2

--

T/Hr

--

9

HJF63

502

PI

PR. AFTER OP FLR STRAINER

HFO

1 NB 50

19

Kg/cm 2

ft

o

--

--

--

10 HJF63

401

PP

PR. AT HFO HEADER

HFO

1 NB 50

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm 2

ft

o

--

--

--

11 HJF63 12 HJF63

503 001-002

PI

PR. AFTER OP FLR STRAINER

PSCH PR. OP FLR HFO

PI PT

PR. AT HFO HEADER PR. AFTR HOFCV

HFO HFO

1 NB 50 2 NB 50

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm 2

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm 2 2

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-8

13 HJF63

102 - 104

PSCL PR. AT HFO HEADER

HFO

3 NB 50

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm

14 HJF63

105

PSAL PR. AT HFO HEADER

HFO

1 NB 50

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm 2

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm

2

Kg/cm

2

15 HJF63 16 HJF63

17 HJF63

CT CT

CT

001 501

104

TE TI

TEMP. AT HFO HDR TEMP. AT HFO HEADER

TSAL TEMP. AT HFO HDR

GO TO INDEX

HFO HFO

HFO

1 NB 50 1 NB 50

1 NB 50

13 to 4.5

13 to 4.5

Kg/cm 2

ft

C

--

--

--

--

--

C

---

C

o

C

--

--

--

0.3

0.1- Kg/sq 1.5 .cm

COI

Kg/sq .cm

--

L/ I

--

--

T

--

L/ I

0-60 ---

COI

Kg/c m2

--

--

--

--

--

Kg/c m2

--

--

o

D/I,C

ft

--

o

F/ N

3.5

1.6 Kg/sq to16 .cm

COD

ft

--

o

D/ A

4

1.6 Kg/sq to16 .cm

COD

--

o

--

o

ft ft

ft

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

C

C C C

o

C

---

---

---

0

D/ I --

--

L/ I

D/ A

C

--

0Deg.c 200

ft-5

90Deg.c 200

GM20102-C4K55-Z

WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

Kg/c m2

ft

GM30102-G5BDD-Z GM30102-G5BDD-Z

--

Kg/sq .cm

0 to Kg/sq 25 .cm

WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD

0

C

--


SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD

GM20102-A8K55-Z GM20102-A8K55-Z

---

COD

WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD SWITZER GM731INSTRUMENT OT-Q4KLTD 55-Z

REMARKS

SCOPE

D/ A

--

--

01 TEMP OK

COI

Kg/c m2

35

T

0.3

--

34

3/4"NPT(F)

D/ A

D/I

33

M33X2(M)

0.1- Kg/sq 1.5 .cm

--

32

M33X2(F)


Kg/sq .cm

8 to Kg/sq 32 .cm

31

GM731OT-Q4K55-Z

0-60

18

30

SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD

L/ I

0-60

29

COD

0Deg.c 200

L/ I

28

REVISION

90Deg.c 200

27

CABLE CONNECTION

26

INST_END_CONN

25


24

F/N

C

C

ft

L/ I

C

ft

F/N

23

MODEL


C

22

MAKE


o

ft

21

UNIT OF SEC. INST.

20

RANGE OF SEC. INST.

19

UNIT OF PY. INST.

18

RANGE OF PY. INST.

17

MAX. OTHERS.

16

UNIT OF OTHERS

OP.TEMP

Kg/cm 2

15

OP. OTHERS.

14

UNIT OF TEMP.

13

CONT.ACTION

19.5

12

MAX.TEMP

LINE SIZE

HFO

1 NB 50

11

UNIT OF PRESS

QTY / BOILER

HFO

10

MAX.PRESS

9

OP.PRESS

8

SET POINT

TSCH TEMP-OP FLR HFO

7

MEDIUM

101

6

DESCRIPTION

CT

5

BCR : 582

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Fuel Oil system

FUNCTION

HJF60

4

TAG-3

3

TAG-2

1

2

TAG-1

SL.NO

1

TYPE OF INST

PROJECT : GTPS BATHINDA (R M) CAPACITY : 2X120 MW UNITS # 3 4 CUSTOMER: PUNJAB STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD CUST NO : 4006 4007

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

--

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

25 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01

25 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

25 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 PR. OK

--

--

--

T

00

M20X1.5(F)

M33X2(M)

--

T

01

25 mm SW

---

--

00 --

M20X1.5(F)

M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

--

--

--

E

00

25 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW TRIP

25 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW ALARM

M33X2(F)

--

--

E

00

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

--

T

01 --

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW ALARM

MASS FLOW METER

Drg. No:4-97-288-91645 / 01 Page 2 of 4

1 NB 40

1.0 - 2.0

Kg/cm 2

ft

--

o

501

PI

PR. AT RTN LINE

HFO

1 NB 40

1.0 - 2.0

21 HJM40

501

PI

PR. BFR ASPRV

STEAM

1 NB 50

11

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

MODEL

MAKE

CONT.ACTION

UNIT OF SEC. INST.

RANGE OF SEC. INST.

UNIT OF PY. INST.

RANGE OF PY. INST.

REMARKS

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

--

--

--

E

00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-9

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C,A

Kg/c m2

Kg/c m2

--

210

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/A

4

1 to Kg/sq 10 .cm

--

COD


GM20102-A7K55-Z

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW ALARM

Kg/cm2

210

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

F/N

3.5

1 to Kg/sq 10 .cm

--

COD


GM20102-A7K55-Z

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW TRIP

--

Kg/cm2

210

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

M33X2(F)

--

--

E

01

--

Kg/cm

2

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

15 mm SW

--

--

--

00 --

Kg/cm

2

--

o

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

--

T

01 --

Kg/cm

2

M20X1.5(F)

M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01 PR. OK

Kg/cm

2

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 PR. OK

Kg/cm

2

--

--

--

T

00

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

15 mm SW

--

--

--

00

--

Kg/cm2

26 HJM40

102-103

PSCL PR. AT AUX ST HDR

STEAM

2 NB 50

7.5

--

27 HJM40

CT

101

STEAM

1 NB 50

7.5

--

16 16 16

210 210

--

--

C

C

C

C

C

C

C C

35

o

35

o

35

o

33 HJF30

502

PI

PR. BEFORE LOFCV

LDO

1 NB40

16

Kg/cm 2

35

34 HJF30

503

PI

PR. AT LDO HDR

LDO

1 NB40

11-3.5

Kg/cm 2

35

35 HJF30

401

PP

PR. AT LDO HDR

LDO

1 NB40

11-3.5

Kg/cm 2

35

2

--

--

--

--

--

C C 4.3 TO C 1.2

--

T/Hr

--

--

L/ I

F/N

14

8 to Kg/sq 32 .cm

--

Kg/c m2

D/ I

--

--

--

--

L/I

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

C C

--

0Deg.c 400

L/I

--

C

0-16

Kg/sq 0-40 .cm

o

--

--

3,3.5 0-40

--

36 HJF30

001-002

PR. AT LDO HDR

LDO

2 NB40

11-3.5

Kg/cm

35

--

--

--

--

--

--

DC/I

37 HJF30

102

PSAL PR. AT LDO HDR

LDO

1 NB40

11-3.5

Kg/cm 2

35

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/A

2.5

38 HJF30

103-105

PSCL PR. AT LDO HDR

LDO

3 NB40

11-3.5

Kg/cm 2

35

o

--

--

--

--

--

F/N

2.1

39 HJN10

501

1 NB 50

5.6 to 7 --

Kg/cm 2

35

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

--

--

C C C

C

0-25

COI COI Kg/c m2


GM20102-C4K55-Z

-WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

MASS FLOW METER

--

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

--

COD

--

COD

--

--

--

E

00

--

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

--

00 LOW ALARM

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW TRIP

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

--

1.6- Kg/sq 16 .cm 0-16

--

Kg/c m2

0-25 --

--

WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS

LOW ALARM, LOW TRIP

Kg/sq .cm

0-25

o

GO TO INDEX

01 --

o

7.5

ATOM. AIR

T

--

1 NB 50

PR. AT AA HDR

--


STEAM

PI

M33X2(M)

--

PSAL PR. AT AUX ST HDR

PT

M33X2(F)

--

101

1 NB40

01

Kg/sq .cm

LDO

T

0-16

25 HJM40

FLOW - OP.FLR LFO

--

--

210

FT

M20X1.5(M)

L/ I

Kg/cm 2

001

M20X1.5(F)

--

--

CF

01

--

7.5

32 HJF30

T

--

2 NB 50

1 NB40

--

--

STEAM

LDO

M20X1.5(M)

--

PR. AT AUX ST HDR

PSCH PR. BEFORE LOTV

M20X1.5(F)

o

PT

101

01 --

--

001-002

T

--

31 HJF30

--

0Deg.c 400

24 HJM40

1 NB40

M33X2(M)

--

210

LDO

--

M33X2(F)

L/ I

Kg/cm 2

PR. BEFORE LOTV

--

01 LOW TRIP

--

--

PI

Kg/sq .cm

T

--

7.5

501

0-25

3/4"NPT(F)

--

1 NB 50

--

--

M33X2(M)

--

STEAM

30 HJF30

Kg/sq 0-60 .cm

--

M33X2(F)

--

PR. BFR ASPRV

7.5

C

--

SWITZER GM731INSTRUMENT OT-Q4K55-Z LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

o

PI

1 NB 50

C

COD


502

STEAM


--

TEMP. AT AS HDR


210

23 HJM40

TI

MAX. OTHERS.

Kg/cm 2

210

502

UNIT OF OTHERS

L/ I

Kg/cm 2

CT

OP. OTHERS.

--

--

29 HJM40

0Deg.c 200

--

11

7.5

--

--

1 NB 50

1 NB 50

L/ I

--

STEAM

STEAM

--

--

TEMP. AT AS HDR

PR. AT AUX ST HDR

--

o

TI

PP

--

--

501

401

--

90Deg.c 200

ft

CT

--

ft-15

Kg/cm 2

22 HJM40

28 HJM40

C

F/ N

SCOPE

HFO

C

REVISION

o

CABLE CONNECTION

--

INST_END_CONN

ft


Kg/cm 2

TEMP. AT AUX ST HDR

UNIT OF TEMP.

OP.TEMP

13 to 4.5

20 HJF67

TE

MAX.TEMP

UNIT OF PRESS

3 NB 50

SET POINT

TEMP. AT RTN LINE

HFO

FUNCTION

TI

MAX.PRESS

501

OP.PRESS

CT

LINE SIZE

19 HJF67

TSCL TEMP. AT HFO HDR

QTY / BOILER

101 -103

MEDIUM

CT

BCR : 582


DESCRIPTION

TAG-3

18 HJF63

TYPE OF INST

TAG-2

TAG-1

SL.NO


Kg/sq .cm

--

COD

Kg/c m2

--

SWITZER GM201INSTRUMENT 02-A8KLTD 55-Z WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

Drg. No:4-97-288-91645 / 01 Page 3 of 4


BCR : 582

SET POINT

RANGE OF PY. INST.

UNIT OF SEC. INST.

CONT.ACTION


INST_END_CONN

CABLE CONNECTION

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

--

--

--

E

00 --

41 HJN10

401

PP

PR. AT AA HDR

ATOM. AIR

1 NB 50

5.6 to 7 --

Kg/cm 2

35

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/c m2

Kg/c m2

COD

15 mm SW

--

--

--

00

42 HJN10

101-102

PSCL PR. AT AA HDR

ATOM. AIR

1 NB 50

5.6 to 7 --

Kg/cm 2

35

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

F/N

3

1 to Kg/sq 10 .cm

Kg/c m2

COD

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW TRIP

43 HJN10

103

PSAL PR. AT AA HDR

ATOM. AIR

1 NB 50

5.6 to 7 --

Kg/cm 2

35

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

F/N

3.5

1 to Kg/sq 10 .cm

--

COI

15 mm SW

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4"NPT(F)

T

01 LOW ALARM

--

Kg/sq 0-25 .cm

--

--

'M20X1.5(M)

T

01

'M20X1.5(M)

T

01

T

01

HJF11,12,1 44 3&14

301

PI

PR.AT.BNR FRONT ELAB

OP.PRESS

MEDIUM

HFO / LDO 4 NB 25

11/10

--

Kg/cm 2

45

HJF11,12,1 3&14

302

PI

PR.AT.BNR FRONT ELAB

STEAM / AIR

4 NB 25

6/6

--

Kg/cm 2

46

HJF21,22,2 3&24

301

PI

PR.AT.BNR FRONT ELCD

HFO

4 NB 25

11

--

Kg/cm 2

HJF21,22,2 47 3&24

302

PI

PR.AT.BNR FRONT ELCD

48 HJF50

CT

501

TI

TEMP. BEFORE HEATER SET

HFO

1 NB 50

HFO

1 NB 50

49 HJF50

CT

401

TW


50 HJF50

CT

101

TE


ft / 35

--

210 / -35 ft

STEAM

4 NB 25

6.00

--

Kg/cm 2

210

HFO

1 NB 50

22.00

--

Kg/cm 2

pt

22.00

--

Kg/cm

2

pt

22.00

--

Kg/cm 2

pt

--

C C C

C

o

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-10

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-25

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

--

--

--

--

C

C

--

L/ I

--

0Deg.c 100

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

M20X1.5(F)

--

00

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

M33X2(F)

E

01

T

01 LOW ALARM

C C

--

--

--

D/ A

--

52 HJF60

CT

401

TW

TEMP. AFTR HEATER SET

HFO

1 NB 50

21.00

--

Kg/cm 2

ft+5

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

TE


HFO

2 NB 50

21.00

--

Kg/cm 2

--

Kg/cm

2

Kg/cm

2

Kg/cm

2

2

--

55 HJF60

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-10

56 HJF60 57 HJF60

001&002 501 401

PT PI PP

PR. AFTR HEATER SET

HFO

PR. AFTR HEATER SET

HFO

PR. AFTR HEATER SET

HFO

2 NB 50 1 NB 50

21.00 21.00

--

1 NB 50

21.00

---

Kg/cm

--

C

C

ft+5 --

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

ft+5

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I

--

ft+5 --

o

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

ft+5

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

ft+5 --

C C C C C

90Deg.c 200

0Deg.c 200

Kg/sq 0-60 .cm

--

COD

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

58 HJF54

501

PI

PR. BEFORE HOPCV

HFO

1 NB 40

1.5 TO 3.5

59 HJF54

502

PI

PR. AFTR HOPCV

HFO

1 NB 40

1.5 TO 3.5

--

Kg/cm 2

--

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-10

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

60 HJT50

502

PI

PR. BEFORE HOTCV

STEAM

1 NB 50

11.00

--

Kg/cm 2

210

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-25

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

61 HJT50

501

PI

PR. AFTR HOTCV

STEAM

1 NB 50

11.00

--

Kg/cm 2

210

62 HJT50

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AFTR HOTCV

STEAM

1 NB 50

11.00

--

Kg/cm 2

210

GO TO INDEX

01

--

--

001&002

T

--

--

CT

M33X2(M)

--

o

54 HJF60

M33X2(F)

--

C

ft+5 --

Kg/cm

01

o

--

Kg/cm 2

2

T

--

--

--

'M20X1.5(M)

L/ I

21.00

21.00

M20X1.5(F)

--

1 NB 50

1 NB 50

--

--

HFO

HFO

'M20X1.5(M)

--



M20X1.5(F)

--

TSAL

TI

WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

--

C

101

501

GM20102-A7K55-Z GM20102-A7K55-Z

o

--

CT

CT

SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD SWITZER INSTRUMENT LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

Kg/sq 0-10 .cm

51 HJF60

53 HJF60

--

REMARKS

FUNCTION

o

SCOPE


--

REVISION


35

MODEL

MAX. OTHERS.

UNIT OF OTHERS

Kg/cm 2

MAKE

OP. OTHERS.

5.6 to 7

RANGE OF SEC. INST.

UNIT OF TEMP.

1 NB 50

UNIT OF PY. INST.

OP.TEMP

ATOM. AIR

MAX.TEMP

UNIT OF PRESS

PR. AT AA HDR

MAX.PRESS

PT

LINE SIZE

TYPE OF INST

001

QTY / BOILER

TAG-3

DESCRIPTION

TAG-2

40 HJN10

SL.NO

TAG-1


--

--

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

C

C

C

--

Kg/sq 0-10 .cm

--

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-25

Kg/sq .cm

--

--

o

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0Deg.c 400

--

--

C

C


GM731OT-Q4K55-Z

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

3/4"NPT(F)

--

00

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

T

01

M33X2(F)

---

E

00

E

00

T

01

--

00

M20X1.5(F)



WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD WAAREE INSTRUMENTS LTD

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

25 mm SW

---

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

--

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

T

01

M20X1.5(F)

'M20X1.5(M)

T

01

M33X2(F)

M33X2(M)

T

01

Drg. No:4-97-288-91645 / 01 Page 4 of 4

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-11

GO TO INDEX

PROJECT : GTPS BATHINDA (R & M) CAPACITY : 2X120 MW UNITS # 3 & 4 CUSTOMER: PUNJAB STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD CUST NO : 4006 & 4007

HAC10

CT

001 401 401

TE TW PP

TEMP. AT ECO. I/L TEMP. AT ECO. I/L PR. AT ECO. I/L

WATER

151.1 151.1

161.8

Kg/cm2

161.8

Kg/cm

2

Kg/cm

2

161.8

239 239 239

--

-- 00

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

244

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

C

--

--

5

HAC10

501

PI

PR. AT ECO. I/L

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

151.1

161.8

Kg/cm2

239

244

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-250

kg/sq.cm

--

--

WAAREE INSTRUME NTS LTD

6

HAC10

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT ECO. I/L

WATER

1

D273 X 28

151.1

161.8

Kg/cm2

239

244

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-400

Deg.c

--

--


7

HAC11

CT

401

TW

TEMP. AT ECO. O/L - L

WATER

1

D219.1 x 22.3

148.2

161.3

Kg/cm2

297

299

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

1

D219.1 x 22.3

1

D219.1 x 22.3

1

D219.1 x 22.3

8 9 10

HAC11 HAC12 HAC12

CT CT CT

001 401 001

TE TW TE

TEMP. AT ECO. O/L - L TEMP. AT ECO. O/L - R TEMP. AT ECO. O/L - R

WATER WATER WATER

148.2 148.2

161.3

Kg/cm2

161.3

Kg/cm

2

2

299

0

299

0

297

299

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

297 297

C C

---

---

---

---

---

D/I T

---

0

C

-0

148.2

161.3

Kg/cm

D48.3 X 1 148.2 7.14

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,N,A

--

--

C

0

C

--

-0

REMARKS

--

C

--

0

E 00

0

--

E 00

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

244

--

--

--

0

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

0

--

35

REVISION

--

33 34

SCOPE

--

32 CABLE CONNECTION

--

244

C

0

Kg/cm2

31

INST_END_CONN

Kg/cm2

30


--

29

MODEL

D/I

28

MAKE

--

27

CONT. ACTION

--

26

UNIT_OF_SEC_INST

1

D33.4X 6.35

WATER

151.1

--

25 RANGE_OF SEC_INST

1

D273 X 28

--

C

24

UNIT_ OF_PY_INST

1

WATER

--

0

23 RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

244

22

SET POINT

239

21

FUNCTION

Kg/cm2

20

BCR : 574


161.8

19 MAX. VELOCITY(m/Sec.)

151.1

D273 X 28

18

UNIT OF OTHERS

D33.4X 6.35

17

MAX. OTHERS.

1

16

OP. OTHERS.

WATER

15

UNIT OF TEMP.

14

MAX.TEMP

4

HAC10

CT

13

OP.TEMP

3

HAC10

12

UNIT OF PRESS

2

PR. AT ECO. I/L

11

MAX.PRESS

PT

10

OP.PRESS

001

9

LINE SIZE

8

QTY / BOILER

HAC10

7

MEDIUM

1

6

DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF INST

5

TAG-3

4

TAG-2

3

TAG-1

2

SL.NO

1

Measurement and Control Recommendation of Water Steam system

---

---

-- 00

M20 X 1.5[M]

T

01

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91148 2 [M]

T

01

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

---

E 00

C

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-12

11

HAD10

CL

002

LT

LEVEL AT DRUM - L

WATER & STEAM

12

HAD10

CL

003

LT

LEVEL AT DRUM - R

WATER & STEAM

1

D48.3 X 148.2 7.14

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,N,A

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

---

E 00

13

HAD10

CL

004

LT

LEVEL AT DRUM - R

WATER & STEAM

1

D48.3 X 148.2 7.14

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,N,A

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

---

E 00

14

HAD10

CL

501

DWLG LEVEL AT DRUM - L

WATER & STEAM

1

D48.3 X 148.2 7.14

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

---

T

01

15

HAD10

CL

001

EWLI

LEVEL AT DRUM - L

WATER & STEAM

1

D33.4X 6.35

148.2

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I,N

--

--

--

--

BHEL

BHELVI SION20 M

---

---

T

01

16

HAD10

CL

502

DWLG LEVEL AT DRUM - R

WATER & STEAM

1

D48.3 X 148.2 7.14

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

--

--

--

BHEL

--

---

---

T

01

17

HAD10

CL

005

EWLI

WATER & STEAM

1

D33.4X 6.35

148.2

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I,N

--

--

--

--

BHEL

BHELVI SION20 M

---

---

T

01

18

HAD10

CT

101112

TE

TEMP.(METAL) AT DRUM

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

BHEL

--

T

01

19

HAD10

001002

PT

PR. AT DRUM

WATER & STEAM

2

D33.4X 6.35

148.2

158.2

Kg/cm2

340

346

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

--

--

--

LEVEL AT DRUM - R

GO TO INDEX

0

C

0

C

Kg/cm2

0

C

Kg/cm2

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

--

E 00

Drg. No:4-97-288-91644/01 Page 2 of 4

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0-250

kg/sq.cm

STEAM

1

D368 X 40

145.4

155.4

Kg/cm2

347

357

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

0

C

0

1

D368 X 40

145.4

155.4

Kg/cm2

347

357

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

0

C

0

1

D368 X 40

155.4

Kg/cm

2

357

0

145.4

155.4

Kg/cm

2

347

357

0

--

--

--

--

--

STEAM STEAM

24

HAH10

CT

402

TW

TEMP.AT LTSH HDR

STEAM

1

D368 X 40

25

HAH10

CT

003020

TE

TEMP.(METAL) AT LTSH TUBE I/L

METAL

18

--

26

HAH20

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L

STEAM

145.4

1

D 323.9 144.6 X 32

Kg/cm

2

155

Kg/cm

2

155

Kg/cm2

155

27

HAH20

CT

401

TW

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L

STEAM

1

D 323.9 144.6 X 32

28

HAH50

CT

401

TW

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L

STEAM

1

D 323.9 144.6 X 32

1

D 323.9 144.6 X 32

152.9

29

HAH50

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L

STEAM

155

Kg/cm2

347

C C

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--


--

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

C

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

C

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00 -- 00

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

539

0C

0

--

0

0

C

--

--

REVISION

--

SCOPE

--

T

01

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

T

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00 -- 00

01

467

0

457

467

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

457

467

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 01

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

E 01 E 00

457

457

467

0

C

C

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

D/I

--

--

C

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

30

HAH30

CT

001003

TE

TEMP. AT DESH O/L

STEAM

3

D 323.9 142.9 X 32

Kg/cm

2

446

456

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I/C

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

31

HAH30

CT

401

TW

TEMP. AT DESH O/L

STEAM

1

D 323.9 142.9 X 32

152.9

Kg/cm

2

446

456

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

32

HAH60

CT

001003

TE

TEMP. AT DESH O/L

STEAM

3

D 323.9 142.9 X 32

152.9

Kg/cm2

446

456

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

E 01

1

D 323.9 142.9 X 32

152.9

2

456

0

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 01 E 00

33 34

35

36

HAH60 HAH40

LBA01

LBA01

CT

401

CT

001029

501

001003

TW TE

PI

PT

TEMP. AT DESH O/L TEMP. AT PLATEN SH HDR

PR.ATSH MAIN STEAM LINE-L

PR AT SH MAIN STEAM LINE -L

STEAM METAL

STEAM

STEAM

29

--

1

D33.4X 6.35

--

138

3

D33.4X 6.35

138

--

Kg/cm --

446 --

148

Kg/cm

2

540

148

Kg/cm2

540

--

C

--

---

---

---

---

---

T D/I

0

--

-0

583

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-13

37

LBA01

CT

501

TI

TEMP.AT SH MAIN STEAM LINE -L

STEAM

1

D323.9 X 31

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

38

LBA01

CT

001003

TE


STEAM

3

D323.9 X 31

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I/C

--

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/cm2

0-600

Deg.c

0


STEAM

1

PI

PR.ATSH MAIN STEAM LINE-R

STEAM

1

D33.4X 6.35

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

001003

PT

PR AT SH MAIN STEAM LINE -R

STEAM

3

D33.4X 6.35

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

CT

501

TI

TEMP.AT SH MAIN STEAM LINE -R

STEAM

1

D323.9 X 31

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

LBA02

CT

001003

TE


STEAM

3

D323.9 X 31

138

148

Kg/cm2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I/C

--

0

44

LBA02

CT

401

TW


STEAM

1

D323.9 X 31

138

148

2

540

555

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

45

LAE10

401

PP

PR.AT SH SPY CNTRL STN. I/L

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

157.1

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

LBA01

CT

401

TW

40

LBA02

501

41

LBA02

42

LBA02

43

46

LAE10

501

PI

PR.AT SH SPY CNTRL STN. I/L

GO TO INDEX

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

157.1

Kg/cm

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/I

--

C

0-250 Kg/sq.cm

D323.9 X 31

39

C

0

C C

0-250 Kg/sq.cm

Kg/cm2

0-600

Deg.c

C C

Kg/cm2

0-250 Kg/sq.cm

0

C

-0

C

-0

C

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

--


--

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

--

--

--

--

--


--

--

--

T

01

E 01

4-97-288- M33 X 91148 2 [M]

T

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

01

--

--

--

--

--

--


--

--

--

--

--

--

--


--

4-97-288- M33 X 91148 2 [M]

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

--

--

--

--

--

--

--


--

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

0

C

--

0

C

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

T

01

E 01

T

01

-- 00

T

01

Drg. No:4-97-288-91644/01 Page 3 of 4

REMARKS

0

CABLE CONNECTION

346

INST_END_CONN

340


Kg/cm2

MODEL

158.2

MAKE

148.2

CONT. ACTION

D33.4X 6.35

RANGE_OF SEC_INST

1

UNIT_OF_SEC_INST

TEMP.AT LTSH HDR

UNIT_ OF_PY_INST

TW

TEMP.AT LTSH HDR

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

401

TE

SET POINT

CT

002

FUNCTION

HAH10

CT


23

HAH10


22

UNIT OF OTHERS

TEMP.AT LTSH HDR

MAX. OTHERS.

TE

OP. OTHERS.

001

WATER & STEAM

UNIT OF TEMP.

CT

MAX.TEMP

HAH10

OP.TEMP

21

UNIT OF PRESS

PR. AT DRUM

MAX.PRESS

PI

OP.PRESS

TYPE OF INST

501

BCR : 574

LINE SIZE

TAG-3

QTY / BOILER

TAG-2

HAD10


MEDIUM

TAG-1

20

DESCRIPTION

SL.NO


Kg/cm2

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

E 01

48

LAE20

401

PP

PR.AT SPY WTR-DESH I/L

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/cm2

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- 00

49

LAE20

CF

002

FT

FLOW AT SPY WR-DESH I/L

WATER

1

D 21.3X 149.8 4.78

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

20

--

T/H R

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

T/Hr

--

--

--

---

---

E 00

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

149.8

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/cm2

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- 00

2

242

0

C

20

--

T/H R

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

T/Hr

--

--

--

---

---

E 01

L/ I

--

--

--


--

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

--

--

--

--

50

LAE30

401

PP

PR.AT SPY WTR-DESH I/L

149.8

Kg/cm

51

LAE30

CF

002

FT

FLOW AT SPY WR-DESH I/L

WATER

D 21.3X 1 149.8 4.78

52

LAE40

501

PI

PR.RH SPY CNTRL STN I/L

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

90

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

53

LAE40

401

PP

PR.RH SPY CNTRL STN I/L

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

90

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

90

Kg/cm2

242

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/ I

--

Kg/cm

0-160 Kg/sq.cm

Kg/cm2

--4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

REMARKS

REVISION

--

SCOPE

--

CABLE CONNECTION

--

INST_END_CONN

--


--

MODEL

D/I

MAKE

--

CONT. ACTION

--

UNIT_OF_SEC_INST

--

RANGE_OF SEC_INST

SET POINT

--

UNIT_ OF_PY_INST

FUNCTION

--

BCR : 574

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.


2


C

UNIT OF OTHERS

0

MAX. OTHERS.

242

OP. OTHERS.

Kg/cm2

UNIT OF TEMP.

D 168.3 157.1 X 21.95

MAX.TEMP

1

OP.TEMP

WATER

UNIT OF PRESS

TEMP.AT SH SPY CNTRL STN. I/L

MAX.PRESS

TE

OP.PRESS

TYPE OF INST

001

LINE SIZE

TAG-3

CT

QTY / BOILER

TAG-2

LAE10


MEDIUM

TAG-1

47

DESCRIPTION

SL.NO


T

FE BY BHEL(T)

FE BY BHEL(T)

01

-- 00

54

LAE40

CT

001

TE

TEMP.AT RH SPY CNTRL STN. I/L

WATER

D 73.0 X 1 9.53

55

LAE51

401

PP

PR AT DOWNSTREAM OF SRPAY CONTROL VALVE

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

90

Kg/cm2

242

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/cm2

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- 00

56

LAE52

401

PP

PR AT DOWNSTREAM OF SRPAY CONTROL VALVE

WATER

1

D33.4X 6.35

90

Kg/cm2

242

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

Kg/cm2

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- 00

57

LAE51

CF

002

FT

FLOW AT DOWNSTREAM OF SRPAY CONTROL VALVE

WATER

1

D 21.3X4. 78

90

Kg/cm2

242

--

0

C

8.13

--

T/H R

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

T/Hr

--

--

--

---

--

E 00

FE BY BHEL(T)

58

LAE52

CF

002

FT

FLOW AT DOWNSTREAM OF SRPAY CONTROL VALVE

WATER

1

D 21.3X4. 78

90

Kg/cm2

242

--

0

C

8.13

--

T/H R

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

T/Hr

--

--

--

---

--

E 00

FE BY BHEL(T)

59

HAJ05

CT

001002

TE

TEMP.AT RH I/L HDR

STEAM

2

D 406.4 X 17

35.2

Kg/cm2

349

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00

TE

TEMP.(METAL) AT RH TUBES

METAL

21

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

T

01

M20 X 1.5[M]

T

01

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-14

60

HAJ10

CT

001021

61

HCB10

501

PI

PR BEFORE SB PRV

STEAM

1

62

HCB10

001002

PT

PR AFTER SB PRV

STEAM

63

HCB10

502

PI

PR AFTER SB PRV

64

HCB10

CF

201

FT

65

HCB10

201

66

HCB10

CT

101

67

HCB20

42 --

--

--

--

D33.4X 6.35

146

154.6

Kg/cm2

457

475

0

2

D33.4X 6.35

30

40

Kg/cm2

384

408

STEAM

1

D33.4X 6.35

30

40

Kg/cm2

384

FLOW AFTER SBPRV

STEAM

1

D88.9 X5.49

30

40

Kg/cm2

PS

PR AFTER SB PRV

STEAM

1

D33.4X 6.35

30

40

TE

TEMP AFTER SB PRV

STEAM

1

D60.3 X 3.91

30

40

CT

401

TW

STEAM

D60.3 X 1 3.91

30

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

610

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

SB/I,C

--

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

SB/ I,C

1.8 / 2.2 *

Kg/cm2

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

SB/ I,C

12

Kg/cm2

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

SB/I

--

40

Kg/cm2

384

--

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

C

0

C

0

C

68

HCB20

CT

TE

TEMP AT WB DRAIN LINE [FRONT&LEFT]

STEAM

D60.3 X 2 3.91

30

40

Kg/cm

2

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

SB/I,C

--

69

HCB30

CT

401

TW

TEMP AT WB DRAIN LINE [REAR&RIGHT]

STEAM

1

D60.3 X 3.91

30

40

Kg/cm

2

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

70

HCB30

CT

101102

TE

TEMP AT WB DRAIN LINE [REAR&RIGHT]

STEAM

2

D60.3 X 3.91

30

40

Kg/cm2

384

408

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

SB/I,C

--

0

C

0-250 Kg/sq.cm

0-60

Kg/cm2

Kg/cm 2

Kg/sq.cm

--

--

--

--

--


--

--

--

--

--

--


--

--

M20 X 1.5[M]

--

--

---

---

--

10 to 60

0

C

0

C

-0

C

-0

C

0

C

-0

C

---

---

E 01

E 00 SB

SWITZER GM201COI INSTRUME 02-B2KNT LTD 55-Z

Kg/sq.cm

--

101102

GO TO INDEX

0

Train Ticke

--

TEMP AT WB DRAIN LINE [FRONT&LEFT]

--

T

01

E 01

T

* wall blower/LRSB

01 PR.OK:SB

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00 SB

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00 E 00 SB

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91549 2 [M]

-- 00

--

--

--

4-97-288- M33 X 91548 2 [M]

E 00 SB

Drg. No:4-97-288-91644/01 Page 4 of 4

Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited High Pressure Boiler Plant, Tiruchirapalli- 620 014 Controls & Instrumentation / FB

PROJECT: BHATINDA - R& M 2 X 120 MW

UINIT – 3 & 4

RECOMMENDED WRITE UP ON INTERLOCKS AND PROTECTION FOR BOILER HOUSE AUXILIARIES [For Internal Circulation]

BCR NO: 501

PREPARED

CHECKED

APPROVED

DATE

DRAWING NO.

DEVAKUMAR P

R. PRIYA KALA

E.S.SALAI KUBERAN

04.09.07

4-97-096-91741

REV 00

Sheet : 1 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-15

Customer: M/s. Punjab State Electricity Board. Project: BHATINDA 2x120 MW Units # 3 & 4 R & M Document:

DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV

RECOMMENDED WRITE UP ON INTERLOCKS AND PROTECTION FOR BOILER HOUSE AUXILIARIES

00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 2 of 11

GENERAL: Today’s steam generators are larger in size and sophisticated in nature. Failure of any equipment calls for expensive replacement and results in costlier down time. This emphasises careful planning on the correct procedure for 1) Safe sequence of start-up of equipments in the power plant. 2) Continuous trouble free & efficient operation. 3) Safe sequence of shut down of the equipment when needed. This also leads to provision of adequate & reliable protection to safeguard the various plant equipments under abnormal and dangerous conditions. The operation of the protections shall be accompanied by visual and audible annunciation, which provide definite indication of the primary cause or causes of operation of the protection. Restarting of the equipment, which has once been tripped by protection either by remote, automatic or manual control shall be possible only after the elimination of the cause of tripping. PROTECTIONS ARE CLASSIFIED UNDER THREE GROUPS NAMELY; 1) Protection causing complete shut down of the unit. 2) Protection causing load reduction of the unit. 3) Protection causing annunciation only. 1. PROTECTIONS CAUSING COMPLETE SHUT DOWN OF THE UNIT a) Failure of all feed pumps (i.e.) reserve feed pump if any, fails to start on tripping of running pumps even after a preset time delay. b) Boiler shut down due to failure of both FD fans, all ID fans and other conditions. c) Failure of Reheater protection, which is to ensure continuous steam flow through reheater tubes at, specified conditions. 2.

PROTECTION CAUSING LOAD REDUCTION

a) ID fans: 2 ID fans are required for boiler MCR. If any one of the two running ID fans trips, the boiler load shall be run down to 60% MCR b) FD fans: Any one of the two running FD fans trip, the boiler load shall be run down to 60% MCR. c) Mills, PA fans & coal Feeders: This reduces the boiler load correspondingly due to limitations in fuel firing capabilities. 3. PROTECTIONS CAUSING ANNUNCIATION: The causes that lead to visual/audible annunciation are covered under various sub systems like FSSS, SADC, Sootblower control system, Auxiliary PRDS control system, Fuel oil system, Air & Flue gas system, Steam & water system etc. These interlocks & protection systems are divided into two portions based on the area they cover as briefly described below. a) Boiler auxiliaries interlock & protection: This system takes care of sequence of starting protection and interlock of boiler auxiliaries like FD fans, ID fans, Dampers, Valves, etc. covered in this write up. b) Furnace safeguard supervisory system (FSSS): This system takes care of interlocks required for starting, supervising the operating and safe shut down of the equipments connected with fuel firing system.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-16


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 00

REV RECOMMENDED WRITE UP ON INTERLOCKS AND PROTECTION FOR BOILER HOUSE AUXILIARIES

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 3 of 11

BOILER HOUSE AUXILIARY INTERLOCKS: This Boiler is equipped with 2 ID fans with hydraulic coupling 2 FD fans 2 PA fans Tubular Air Heaters ERV 2 FTP’s FD &PA Fan Lube oil System. 1.0 ID FAN INTERLOCKS (FOR 2 FANS WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLING) 1.1 Conditions existing when the unit is shut down and prior to starting of ID fans.

ID fan 'A' and ID fan 'B' OFF. Regulating vanes of fans A & B fully open Hydraulic coupling scoop tube in maximum position Inlet gates of ID fans A & B open Outlet gates of ID fans A & B open The regulating vanes will be on manual control during shutdown and signal from furnace draft control to regulating vanes of ID fans & hydraulic coupling scoop tube are disconnected.

1.2 Starting ID Fan 'A' (ID fan 'B' OFF) ID fan 'A' shall be prohibited from starting till the following conditions are satisfied:

Regulating vanes of ID Fan-A & Hydraulic coupling scoop tube in minimum position. Outlet gate of ID Fan-A closed. Inlet gate of ID Fan-A closed APH – Gas outlet Dampers –HNA 37 AA 001 & HNA 35 AA 001 – are in full open condition. ID Fan and Fan motor bearing temperature not very high. Motor winding temperature not very high Hydraulic coupling of FAN-A oil level OK (Manual check only) Cooler ready for operation (manual check only).

When ID fan 'A' is started (ID Fan B is OFF), impulses shall be given for: Opening the inlet gate and outlet gate of ID fan A after the motor reaches rated speed. Connecting the regulating vanes/scoop tube control of ID fan A to the auto control after the following conditions are satisfied 1. Fan-A hydraulic coupling oil filter DP is low 2. Fan-A hydraulic coupling control oil pressure is OK 3. Fan-A hydraulic coupling working oil temperature is low Closing the inlet gate and the outlet gate of ID fan B and bringing the regulating vanes/scoop tube control to minimum position. Permission to start either FD Fan A or FD Fan B.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-17


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 4 of 11

1.3 Starting ID fan B (ID Fan A is OFF) Interlocks similar to those at clause 1.2 shall hold good for this condition. 1.4 Tripping of ID Fan A (ID Fan B is OFF) a) ID fan 'A' shall trip automatically under following conditions. ID fan A bearing temperature too high (prior to this, ID fan A bearing temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) ID fan a motor bearing/winding temp. Too high (prior to this, ID fan 'A' motor bearing/winding temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) Fan –A Hydraulic 1. Coupling control oil pressure is very low (< 0.6 bar) 2. Coupling working oil temperature is very high ( >110 Deg. C) 3. Coupling oil cooler outlet temperature is very high Post purge fan trip from FSSS ID fan A motor protection acted. b) When ID fan A trips (ID fan B is OFF) impulses shall be given for: Opening the outlet gate of ID fan B Opening the inlet gate of ID fan B. Disconnecting the impulse from auto control system (output from A/M station) to regulating vane and scoop position. Opening the regulating vanes/scoop control of ID fan A & ID fan B to wide-open position. Tripping the working FD fans. Boiler tripping. To keep the inlet gate and outlet gate of ID fan A & ID fan B open 1.5 Tripping of ID fan B (ID fan A is OFF): Interlocks similar to those at clause 1.4 shall hold good for this condition 1.6 Starting of ID fan B (ID fan A is ON) a) ID fan B shall be prohibited from starting unless the following conditions are satisfied:

Outlet gate of fan B is closed Inlet gate of fan B is closed Regulating vanes/scoop of fan B are in minimum position APH – Gas outlet Dampers –HNA 37 AA 001 & HNA 35 AA 001 – are in full open condition. Fan and Fan motor bearing temperature not very high Motor winding temperature not very high Hydraulic coupling of FAN-B oil level OK (Manual check only) Cooler ready for operation (manual check only).

b) When ID fan B is started, impulses shall be given for: Opening the inlet gate and outlet gate of fan B after the motor reaches the rated speed Connecting the regulating vanes/scoop of fan B to auto control (release to auto) after the following conditions are satisfied

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-18


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 5 of 11

1. Fan-B hydraulic coupling oil filter DP is low 2. Fan-B hydraulic coupling control oil pressure is OK 3. Fan-B hydraulic coupling working oil temperature is low Permission to start other FD fan. 1.7 Starting of ID fan A (ID Fan B is ON): Interlocks similar to those at clause 1.6 shall hold good for this condition. 1.8 Tripping of ID fan B (ID fan A is ON) (a) ID fan B shall trip automatically under the following conditions: Fan bearing temperature too high (prior to this fan bearing temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) Fan motor bearing/winding temperature too high (prior to this fan motor bearing/winding temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) [Set Point for fan Bearing Temperature interlock: Trip: > 105 dec C Alarm: > 95 dec C] Post purge fan trip from FSSS ID fan B motor protection acted. Fan – B Hydraulic 1. Coupling control oil pressure is very low 2. Coupling working oil temperature is very high 3. Coupling oil cooler outlet temperature is very high b.

When ID Fan B trips (ID fan A is ON) impulses shall be given for: Disconnecting the regulator from acting on the regulating vane/scoop of ID Fan B. Bringing the regulating vane of Fan B to the minimum position and Scoop to maximum position Closing the inlet gate of ID Fan B Closing the outlet gate of ID fan B Tripping the FD fan B, provided FD fan A is on Energisation of partial load relay (load to be limited to 60%)

1.9 Tripping of ID fan A (ID fan is ON): Interlocks similar to those at clause 1.8 shall hold good for this condition. 2.0 FD FAN INTERLOCKS Ref : Lub. Oil Scheme for FD Fan –2-00-098-21614. 2.1 Conditions prior to starting FD fans:

FD Fan A and FD Fan B off Fan impellers tilted to maximum opening Outlet dampers are fully open Fan impeller regulator disconnected from Auto control. Lube oil pumps of FD fans off

2.2 Starting FD fan A (FD fan B is off): a) FD Fan A shall be prohibited from starting until the following conditions are satisfied:

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-19


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 6 of 11

ID Fan A or ID Fan B is on Control oil pressure adequate [ > 8 ATA] & lub. Oil pressure adequate [ > 0.8 ATA] (control oil pressure adequate lamp indication shall be provided on the control desk) Fan A impeller tilt in the minimum position Outlet damper of fan A in closed position Fan/motor bearing temperature not very high Motor winding temperature not very high b) When FD fan A is started (FD Fan B is off) impulses shall be given for: Outlet damper of fan A to open after the motor reaches rated speed The outlet damper of FD fan B to close & impeller blades of fan B to be driven to minimum position Connecting the impeller of Fan A control drive to auto control 2.3 Starting of FD fan B (FD fan A is off): Interlocks similar to those at clause 2.2 shall hold good for this condition. 2.4 Tripping of FD fan A (FD fan B is off) a) FD fan A shall trip automatically under the following conditions: FD fan A bearing temperature too high (prior to this, FD fan A bearing temperature high will be annunciated in DDCMIS) [ Set Point: Trip: > 105 dec C Alarm: > 95 dec C] FD fan A motor bearing/winding temperature too high (prior to this, FD fan A motor temperature high will be annunciated in DDCMIS) Both ID fans trip Post purge fan trip FD fan A motor protection acted Note: If control Oil Pressure < 6 ATA or lub. Oil Pressure < 0.4 ATA it shall be annunciated in DDCMIS b) When FD Fan A trips (FD fan B is off) impulses shall be given for:

Disconnecting the impeller control drive from auto control system (output signal from A/M station) Bringing the impeller of Fan A to the maximum position Bringing the impeller of FD fan B to the maximum position Opening the outlet damper of FD fan B Open the emergency scanner air damper Boiler tripping The outlet damper of FD fan A shall remain open Tripping of running ID fans

2.5 Tripping FD fan B (FD fan A is off): Interlocks similar to those of clause 2.4 shall hold good for this condition 2.6 Starting FD fan B (FD fan A is on): a) FD fan B (FD fan A is on) shall be prohibited from starting until the following conditions are satisfied:

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-20


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 7 of 11

Both ID fans are on Control oil pressure adequate [ > 8 ATA] & lub. Oil pressure adequate [ > 0.8 ATA] (control oil & lube Oil adequate lamp indication shall be provided on control desk) Fan B impeller tilt in the minimum position Outlet damper of Fan B in closed position Fan and fan motor bearing temperature not very high Motor winding temperature not very high. b) When FD fan B is started (FD fan A is on) impulses shall be given for: Opening the outlet damper of FD fan B after the motor reaches rated speed Connecting the impeller control drive of FD fan B to auto control 2.7 Starting FD fan A (FD fan B is on): Interlocks similar to those at clause 2.6 shall hold good for this condition 2.8 Tripping of FD fan B (FD fan A is on): a) FD fan B shall trip (FD fan A is on) under the following conditions: ID fan B trips FD fan B motor bearing/winding temperature too high (prior to this, FD fan B motor bearing/winding temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) FD fan B bearing temperature too high (prior to this, FD fan B bearing temperature high shall be an annunciated in DDCMIS) [Set Point: Trip: > 105 dec C Alarm: > 95 dec C] FD fan B motor protection acted Note: If control oil Pressure < 6 ATA or lub. Oil Pressure < 0.4 ATA it shall be annunciated in DDCMIS b) When FD fan B trips (FD fan A is on), impulses shall be given for:

Disconnecting regulator impulse from acting on impeller control drive of fan B Bringing impeller of fan B to the minimum position Closing the outlet damper of fan B Energisation of partial load relay to reduce boiler load to 60% MCR. Tripping mills working more than three through FSSS

2.9 Tripping of FD fan A (FD fan B is on): Interlocks similar to those at clause 2.8 shall hold good for this condition. 3.0 PA FAN INTERLOCKS: 3.1 Conditions prior to start up

PA fan A and PA fan B off Outlet gates of fan A and fan B closed Regulating vanes of fan A and fan B in closed position. Regulating vane regulator disconnected Lub. Oil pumps are off

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-21


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 8 of 11

3.2 Starting PA fan A (PA fan B off) a) PA fan A (PA fan B off) shall be prohibited from starting until the following conditions are satisfied:

Regulating vanes of PA Fan A in the minimum position Outlet gate of PA fan A in closed position Any one FD fans is on Purge complete PA fan and fan motor bearing temperature not very high Lub. Oil pressure adequate.

Note: Signal from PA fan A start pushbutton shall simultaneously go to start PA fan A and seal air fan A b) When PA fan A is started (PA fan B is off), impulses shall be given for:

Opening the outlet gate of PA Fan A after the motor reaches rated speed Connecting the regulating vanes of PA fan A to auto control Bringing the regulating vanes of PA fan B to the minimum position Closing the outlet damper of PA fan B Permission to start any three mills through FSSS.

3.3 Starting PA fan B (PA fan A is off) Interlocks similar to those at clause 3.2 shall hold good for this condition 3.4 PA fan A shall trip(PA fan B is off) a) PA fan A shall trip (PA fan B is off) under the following conditions: PA fan A bearing temperature too high (prior to this bearing temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) [ Set Point: Trip: > 82 dec C Alarm: > 77 dec C ] PA fan A motor bearing/winding temperature too high (prior to this, motor bearing/winding temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) Boiler trips PA fan A motor protection acted b) When PA fan A trips (PA fan B is off), impulses shall be given for:

Disconnecting the regulating vanes of PA fan A from auto control Bringing the regulating vanes of PA fan A to minimum position Closing the outlet gate of PA fan A Closing the outlet gate of PA fan B Bringing the regulating vane PA fan B to minimum position Tripping all the operating mills (done through FSSS)

3.5 Tripping of PA fan B (PA fan A is off) Interlocks similar to those at clause 3.4 shall hold good for this condition 3.6 Starting PA fan B (PA fan A is on) a) PA fan B shall be prohibited from starting unless the following conditions are satisfied:

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-22


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 9 of 11

Both FD fans are on Regulating vanes of PA fan B in the minimum position Outlet gate of PA fan B in closed position PA fan B and fan motor bearing temperature not very high Lube. Oil pressure adequate. [ > 0.8 ATA]

b) When PA fan B is started (PA fan A is on) impulses shall be given for: Opening the outlet gate of PA fan B after the motor reaches rated speed Connecting the regulating vanes of PA fan B to auto control Permission to start three more mills through FSSS 3.7 Starting PA fan A (PA fan B is on) Interlocks similar to those at clause 3.6 shall hold good for this condition 3.8 Tripping of PA fan B (PA fan A is on) a) PA fan B shall trip (PA fan A is on) under the following conditions: PA fan B bearing temperature too high (prior to this, fan bearing temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) [Set Point: Trip: > 82 dec C Alarm: > 77 dec C] PA fan B motor bearing/winding temperature too high (prior to this, fan motor bearing/winding temperature high shall be annunciated in DDCMIS) Boiler trips PA fan B motor protection b) When PA fan B trips (PA fan A is on), impulses shall be given for:

Disconnecting the regulating vanes of PA fan B from auto control Bringing the regulating vanes of PA fan B to minimum position Closing the outlet gate of PA fan B Energisation of partial load relay (load to be limited to 60%)

3.9 Tripping of PA fan A (PA fan B is on) Interlocks similar to those at clause 3.8 shall hold good for this condition. 3.10 Both the PA fans shall trip simultaneously when any boiler trip condition is present (impulses from FSSS). 4.0 INTERLOCKS FOR FD FAN LUBRICATING/CONTROL OIL SYSTEM: 4.1 FD fan A lube oil/control oil system: REF : Lube oil scheme for Forced Draft Fan Dwg No : 2-00-098-21614 (a) Pump A will start automatically if pump B trips, provided A/M switch is in auto position Pump A will start automatically with a time delay of 0-60 seconds if lube oil pressure falls below a set value <5 ata and the pump B is working provided A/M switch is in auto position. (b) PUMP B will start automatically if pump A trips, provided A/M switch is in auto position.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-23


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 00

REV RECOMMENDED WRITE UP ON INTERLOCKS AND PROTECTION FOR BOILER HOUSE AUXILIARIES

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 10 of 11

Pump B will start automatically with a time delay of 0-60 seconds if lube oil pressure falls below a set value <5 ata and the pump A is working provided A/M switch is in auto position. (c) Pump A or pump B can be started/tripped by pressing the respective push button provided on local push button box only when A/M switch is in manual position. (d) FD fan A shall be prohibited from starting until the control oil pressure is adequate [> 8 ATA] 4.2 FD fan B lubricating oil system: Interlocks similar to those at 5.1 (a), (b), (c) and (d) above shall hold good for FD fan B lubricating oil system. 5.0 Interlock for PA fan lubricating oil system REF : Lube oil scheme for Forced Draft Fan Dwg No : 2-00-098-21615 Interlocks similar to 4.0 shall hold good for PA fan lube oil system, (Except the lube oil pressure set < 0.6 ata for auto start). 6.0 FURNACE TEMPERATURE PROBE Furnace temperature probe can be advanced/retracted using the push buttons provided in DCS as well as from site. Furnace temperature probe shall be prohibited from being advanced further into the furnace if furnace temperature sensed by it is more than 540 o C If furnace temperature probe is inside the furnace and the temperature exceeds 540 0 C it will be retracted back automatically. 7.0 ELECTROMATIC RELIEF VALVE : Ref : Write up on ERV Control and ERV control Interconnection Diagram 3-97-597-14693. The electromatic Relief Valve is an automatic, electrically actuated pressure relief valve. ERV’s can be operated using the Push buttons ‘AUTO’ and ‘Manual’ provided in DCS. 8.0 MISCELLANEOUS INTERLOCKS: 8.1 Interlock and protection write-up for DDI gate with motor operated blowers motor: 8.1.1

Guillotine Gate with motor operated blower & manual isolation valve for blower: [HNC 10&20 AA 003]

Gate will close and open according to BHA interlock and protection. Blower shall be continuously working irrespective of whether the gate is in close or open position, when boiler is working. The manual isolation valve in the blower line shall always be open. If the blower trips due to overload, it shall be annunciated.

Note: The blower motor for ID fan outlet gate shall be started simultaneously with ID fan 8.1.2 Interlocks for Guillotine Gate without motor operated blowers but with manual isolation valve are as per BHA interlock and protection requirement. The manual isolation valve in the blower line shall always be open.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-24


DWG No 4-97-096-91741 REV


8.2.0

00

DATE

04/09/2007

SHEET: 11 of 11

Interlocks for motor operated valves with By valves: First open the by valve fully After by valve is fully opened, Main valve may or may not be closed. Main valve can be closed wherever required. The by valve, if not already closed, can be closed when main valve is commanded to close.

8.3.0

Interlocks for valves with integral by:

a. The main valve shall not open unless its motorised integral by valve is in fully open position. b. The motorised integral by valve shall close simultaneously when its main valve is closed.

9.0 MOTOR OPERATED VALVE INTERLOCK REQUIREMENTS GATE VALVES OF 100mm and above in 1500 CL and above Ratings. Valve closing / opening: Actuator motor tripping shall be done by limit switch. Torque switch shall be used as a backup in the control circuit. ALL OTHER GATE & GLOBE VALVES: Valve closing: Actuator motor tripping shall be done by torque switch. Limit switch shall not be used in the control circuit for tripping. Valve opening: Actuator motor tripping shall be done by limit switch. Torque switch shall be used in the control circuit as a back up. Thermostat shall be connected without fail in the starter circuit. 10 REHEATER PROTECTION LOGIC: Re-heater protection shall be provided as part of Boiler House Auxiliaries Interlock and protection system. This protection is provided to protect the Re-heater against starvation of steam flow during abnormal conditions. To take care of Re-heater protection, the Boiler shall be tripped after 10 seconds, when any of the following conditions occur: 1) When Boiler is working and if (i) Generator circuit breakers open and (ii) HP By or LP By valves remain closed less than 2% 2) When Boiler is working and if (i) Turbine trips and (ii) HP By or LP By valves remain closed less than 2% Recommended Re-heater Protection Logic is enclosed. – ANNEXURE A

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-25

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-26

GO TO INDEX

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-27


50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

-0

C

03

HFE10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T=T+5/T+1 D/I,A, N 0

04

HFE10

CT

002013

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A MTR WNDG

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

05

HFE10

CT

502

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-A MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

06

HFE10

CT

014

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

07

HFE10

CT

015

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0

L/ I

--

0

C

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

32

33 34

35

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

0

C

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

0

C

0

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

--

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

08

HFE10

CT

503

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-A NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

09

HFE10

CT

504

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-A DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

10

HFE10

CT

016

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

11

HFE10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT PAF-A O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

12

HFE10

402

PP

PR. AT PAF-A O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

13

HFE10

001

PT

PR. AT PAF-A O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

14

HFE10

CT

017

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-A O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

15

HFE20

401

PP

PR. AT PAF-B SUC

PY.AIR

1

--

-12

-13

mm WC

30

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

00

16

HFE20

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-B MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

17

HFE20

CT

001

TE


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

18

HFE20

CT

502

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-B MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

002013

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-B MTR WNDG

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

T

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

-0

C

0

C

0

0

C

C

---

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

T=T+5/T+1 D/I,A, N 0

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00 00

--

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-28

19

HFE20

CT

20

HFE20

CT

014

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-B MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

21

HFE20

CT

015

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-B NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

22

HFE20

CT

503

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-B NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

23

HFE20

CT

504

TI

TEMP. AT PAF-B DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

24

HFE20

CT

016

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-B DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

25

HFE20

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT PAF-B O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

26

HFE20

402

PP

PR. AT PAF-B O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

27

HFE20

001

PT

PR. AT PAF-B O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

28

HFE20

CT

017

TE

TEMP. AT PAF-B O/L

PY.AIR

1

1400 X 1400

900

943

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

29

HFE30

401

PP

PR. AT AH I/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

882

923

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

GO TO INDEX

D/I,A, N 77 / 82 T

--

0

C

--

0

C

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

0

--

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 2 OF 71

REMARKS

30

--

31

REVISION

mm WC

--

30

SCOPE

-13

--

29

CABLE CONNECTION

-12

--

28

INST_END_ CONN

--

1

27

TAPPING POINT DETAIL DRG.

1

METAL

26

MODEL

PY.AIR


25

MAKE

PR. AT PAF-A SUC

TI

24

CONT.ACTION

PP

501

DESCRIPTION

401

CT

TAG-2

TAG-1 HFE10 HFE10

SL. NO. 01 02

23

UNIT OF SEC. INST

22

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

21

UNIT OF PY. INST

20

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

19

SET POINT

18

FUNCTION

17


16


15

UNIT OF OTHERS

14

MAX. OTHERS.

13

OP. OTHERS.

12

UNIT OF TEMP.

11

MAX.TEMP

10

OP.TEMP

9

UNIT OF PRESS

8

MAX.PRESS

7

OP.PRESS

6

LINE SIZE

5

QTY / BOILER

4

MEDIUM

3

TYPE OF INST

2

TAG-3

1

BCR 590

MEASUREMENT AND CONTROL RECOMMENDATIONS FOR AIR AND FLUE GAS SYSTEM


17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33 34

35

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

32

HFE30

001

PT

TEMP. AT AH I/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

882

923

mm WC

35

55

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

33

HFE35

401

PP

PR. AT PAH O/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

798

833

mm WC

228

270

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

34

HFE35

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT PAH O/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

798

833

mm WC

228

270

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

35

HFE35

001

PT

PR. AT PAH O/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

798

833

mm WC

228

270

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

36

HFE35

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT PAH O/L

PY.AIR

1

2000 X 2000

798

833

37

HLB 10

401

PP

PR. AT FD FAN - A SUC

SEC AIR

1

--

-18

38

HLB 10

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT FD FAN - A MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

39

HLB 10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-A MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

40

HLB 10

CT

002113

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-A MTR WNDG

METAL

12

--

mm WC

228

270

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mm WC

30

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

D/I,A, N 95/ 105

--

0

C

--

--

0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

TYPE OF INST

41

HLB 10

CT

502

TI

TEMP. AT FDF-A MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

42

HLB 10

CT

014

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-A MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

43

HLB 10

CT

015-016

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-A BRG.

METAL

2

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

44

HLB 10

CT

503

TI

TEMP. AT FDF-A BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

45

HLA 10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT FDF-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

46

HLA 10

401

PP

PR. AT FDF-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

47

HLA 10

001

PT

PR. AT FDF-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

48

HLA 10

CT

003

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

C

--

--

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

REVISION

--

--


--

C

MODEL

C

0

MAKE

0

CONT.ACTION

55 55

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

35 35

UNIT OF PY. INST

mm WC mm WC

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

923 923

MAX.PRESS

882 882

OP.PRESS

2000 X 2000 2000 X 2000

LINE SIZE

1 1

QTY / BOILER

PY.AIR PY.AIR

MEDIUM

TEMP. AT AH I/L TEMP. AT AH I/L

DESCRIPTION

TP TE

TAG-3 401 001

TAG-2 CT CT

TAG-1 HFE30 HFE30

SL. NO. 30 31

0

C

0

49

HLA10

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT AH-A I/L

SEC AIR

1850 X 1 1850

50

HLA10

402

PP

PR. AT AH-A I/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

51

HLA10

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT AH-A I/L

SEC AIR

2

1850 X 1850

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

C

--

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

0

C

0

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-29

52

HLA10

002

PT

PR. AT AH-A I/L

SEC AIR

1850 X 1 1850

53

HHL10

401

PP

PR. AT AH-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

54

HHL10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT AH-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

55

HHL10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT AH-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

56

HHL10

001

PT

PR. AT AH-A O/L

SEC AIR

1

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

57

HHL10

CF

001-003

FT

FLOW AT SEC. AIR - L

SEC AIR

3

134

mm WC

255

275

0

C

162

--

--

E

00

58

HHL10

CT

002-004

TE

SEC. AIR TEMP - L

SEC AIR

3

134

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

59

HHL10

402

PP

PR. AT WB - L

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

C

60

HHL10

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT WB - L

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

C

61

HHL10

403

PP

PR. AT WB - L

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

C

GO TO INDEX

0

C

0

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

T/HR

--

--

D / I, C

--

mmWC

t/hr

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

C

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 3 OF 71

REMARKS

16

SCOPE

15

CABLE CONNECTION

14

INST_END_ CONN

13

UNIT OF SEC. INST

12

SET POINT

11

FUNCTION

10


9


8

UNIT OF OTHERS

7

MAX. OTHERS.

6

OP. OTHERS.

5

UNIT OF TEMP.

4

MAX.TEMP

3

OP.TEMP

2

UNIT OF PRESS

1

BCR 590



19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

64

HLB 20

401

PP

PR. AT FD FAN - B SUC

SEC AIR

1

--

-18

mm WC

30

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

65

HLB 20

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT FD FAN - B MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

66

HLB 20

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-B MTR NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

67

HLB 20

CT

002113

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-B MTR WNDG

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

68

HLB 20

CT

014

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-B MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

69

HLB 20

CT

502

TI

TEMP. AT FDF-B MTR DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

70

HLB 20

CT

015-016

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-B BRG.

METAL

2

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

71

HLB 20

CT

503

TI

TEMP. AT FDF-B BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

C

TYPE OF INST

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

--

--

UNIT OF PY. INST

--

C

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

C

0

MAX. OTHERS.

0

OP.TEMP

275 275

UNIT OF PRESS

255 255

MAX.PRESS

mm WC mm WC

OP.PRESS 100 100

LINE SIZE

1 1

QTY / BOILER

SEC AIR SEC AIR

MEDIUM

TEMP. AT WB - L PR. AT WB - L

DESCRIPTION

TP PT

TAG-3 403 002

TAG-2 CT

TAG-1 HHL10 HHL10

SL. NO. 62 63

--

--

-

00

--

--

E

00 00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

0

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

--

--

L/ I

--

0

C

--

--

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

0

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

401

TP

TEMP. AT FDF-B O/R

SEC AIR

73

HLA 20

401

PP

PR. AT FDF-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

74

HLA 20

001

PT

PR. AT FDF-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

50

4-97-288-91551 4-97-288-91550

--

CT

33

35

--

HLA 20

mm WC

33 34

--

72

317

32

--

C

1850 X 1 1850

0

31

--

-0

D/I,A, N 95/ 105

30

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00 00

75

HLA 20

CT

003

TE

TEMP. AT FDF-B O/L

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

317

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

76

HLA 20

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT AH-B I/R

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

77

HLA 20

402

PP

PR. AT AH-B I/R

SEC AIR

1

1850 X 1850

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

78

HLA 20

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT AH-B I/R

SEC AIR

2

1850 X 1850

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

291

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00 00

--

0

0

C

C

0

0

79

HLA 20

002

PT

PR. AT AH-B I/R

SEC AIR

1850 X 1 1850

80

HHL20

401

PP

PR. AT AH-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1900 X 1900

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

81

HHL20

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT AH-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1900 X 1900

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

82

HHL20

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT AH-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1900 X 1900

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

83

HHL20

001

PT

PR. AT AH-B O/R

SEC AIR

1

1900 X 1900

153

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

134

mm WC

255

275

0

C

162

--

--

E

00

1900 X 1900

134

mm WC

255

275

0

C

--

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-30

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

--

--

D / I, C

--

mmWC

t/hr

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mm WC

0

C

DP=10

--

--

--

--

D/A

4

0 to 50

mmWC

mm WC

0

C

DP=10

--

--

--

--

D/A

15

0-50

mmWC

mm WC

0

C

DP=10

--

--

--

D/I

CF

001-003

FT

FLOW AT SEC. AIR - R

SEC AIR

85

HHL20

CT

002-004

TE

SEC. AIR TEMP - R

SEC AIR

3

86

HHL20

402

PP

PR. AT WB - R

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

C

87

HHL20

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT WB - R

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

C

88

HHL20

403

PP

PR. AT WB - R

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

0

89

HHL20

CT

403

TP

TEMP. AT WB - R

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

90

HHL20

002

PT

PR. AT WB - R

SEC AIR

1

100

mm WC

255

275

91

HHQ10

101

PDSL DP ACROS SCA. AIR FTR

SCA AIR

1

--

92

HHQ10

102

PDSH DP ACROS SCA. AIR FTR

SCA AIR

1

--

001

PDT

DP ACROS SCA. AIR FTR

SCA AIR

GO TO INDEX

1

--

0

--

HHL20

HHQ10

C

T/HR

84

1900 X 3 1900

93

0

--

--

0

0

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

--

mmWC

--

C

mmWC

SWITZER COD INSTRUMENT LTD SWITZER mmWC COI INSTRUMENT LTD --

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

GM306-02B5D-DD-Z

1/2" NPT- 3/4" F NPT-F

T

01

GM306-02B5D-DD-Z

1/2" NPT- 3/4" F NPT-F

T

01

E

00

--

--

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 4 OF 71

REMARKS

18

REVISION

17

SCOPE

16

CABLE CONNECTION

15

INST_END_ CONN

14


13

MODEL

12

MAKE

11

CONT.ACTION

10

UNIT OF SEC. INST

9

SET POINT

8

FUNCTION

7


6


5

UNIT OF OTHERS

4

OP. OTHERS.

3

UNIT OF TEMP.

2

MAX.TEMP

1

BCR 590



24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33 34

35

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

96

HHQ40

402

PP

PR. AT SCA. AIR FAN O/L

SCA AIR

1

--

517

mm WC

33

50

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

mmWC

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

SCA AIR / FLUE GAS

97

HHQ40

101

1

--

517/-5

--

mm WC

33/1155

--

0

C

DP

--

--

--

--

F/N

98

HHQ40

001

PDT

DP ACROS SCA. AIR/FURN.

SCA AIR / FLUE GAS

1

--

517/-5

--

mm WC

33/1155

--

0

C

DP

--

--

--

--

D/I

99

HBK10

001

PDT

DP ACROS WB & FURN-L

SEC AIR FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

DP

--

--

--

--

SA/I,C

100 HBK10

PDSL DP ACROS SCA. AIR/FURN.

101-102 PSHH PR. AT FURN -L

FLUE GAS

2

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/I/N

150

50-1200

--

+150

40mmHg-00.05 kg/sq.cm 40 mmHg 0 - 0.05 K /S

mmWC

SWITZER GM301-02-EID mmWC COD INSTRUMENT DD-Z LTD

T

01

mmWC

mmWC

--

--

--

E

00

mmWC

mmWC

--

--

--

E

00

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

1/2" NPT- 3/4" F NPT-F

E

01 00

COI SOR INC

52RN-EE116M4-C2ATTYYWPKA7X

4-97-288-91546

mmWC

mmWC COD SOR INC

4-97-288-91546

mmWC

mmWC

COI

52RN-EE116M4-C2ATTYYVV

mmWC

PSLL PR. AT FURN -L

FLUE GAS

2

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/I N

-175

FLUE GAS/ SEC AIR

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

DP

--

--

--

--

D/A

+150

PR. AT FURN -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91546

--

--

--

TEMP. AT FURN - L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91547

--

--

-

00

PR. AT FURN -L

FLUE GAS

2

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91546

--

--

E

00

PSAH PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/ A

(-)200to200 mmWC

mmWC

4-97-288-91546

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

103-104

105

103 HBK 10

401

PP

104 HBK 10

CT

401

TP

105 HBK 10

001-002

PT

106 HBK20

101

75

107 HBK20

401

PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

108 HBK20

102

PSHH PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/I/N

+150

40mmHg-00.05 kg/sq.cm

109 HBK20

103

PSAL PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/ A

-100

(-)200to200 mmWC

-175

40mmHg-00.05 kg/sq.cm

104

1/2" NPT- 3/4" F NPT-F

PDSH DP ACROS WB & FURN-R

101 HBK 10 102 HBK 10

110 HBK20

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

33

mm WC

UNIT OF PY. INST

mm WC

517

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

317

--

MAX.PRESS

--

1

OP.PRESS

1

SCA AIR

LINE SIZE

SCA AIR

PR. AT SCA. AIR FAN O/L

QTY / BOILER

PR. AT SCA. AIR FAN I/L

PT

MEDIUM

PP

DESCRIPTION

401 001

TAG-2

TAG-1 HHQ11 HHQ40

SL. NO. 94 95

PP

PSLL PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

F/I N

--

--

SWITZER GM204-02COI INSTRUMENT X9K-DD-Z LTD

--

mmWC

--

--

COI SOR INC

--

4-97-288-91546

--

--

--

00

52RN-EE116M4-C2ATTYYWPKA7X

4-97-288-91546

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

4-97-288-91546

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

4-97-288-91546

1/2" NPT(F)

3/4" NPT(F)

T

01

--

--

E

00

4-97-288-91546

--

--

E

00

SWITZER GM204-02mmWC COD INSTRUMENT X9K-DD-Z LTD 52RN-EE116M4-C2AmmWC COD SOR INC TTYYWPKA7X

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-31

111 HBK20

001

PDT

DP ACROS WB & FURN-R

FLUE GAS/ SEC AIR

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

DP

--

--

--

--

SA/I,C,N

112 HBK20

001-002

PT

PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

2

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

113 HBK20

401

TP

PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91547

--

--

--

00

114 HBK20

402

PP

PR. AT FURN -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91546

--

--

--

00

115 HBK10

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT FURN O/L - L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91547

--

--

-

00

116 HBK10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT FURN O/L - L (FTP)

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91547

--

--

T

01

117 HBK20

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT FURN - R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-4

--

mm WC

1155

1160

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91547

--

--

-

00

118 HBK30

401

PP

PR. AT PSH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

119 HBK30

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT PSH O/L-L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

120 HBK30

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT PSH O/L-L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

121 HBK35

401

PP

PR. AT PSH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

122 HBK35

001

PT

PR. AT PSH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

123 HBK35

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT PSH O/L-R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-5

-5

mm WC

1058

1060

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

GO TO INDEX

150, (-)175, 75, (-)100

mmWC

mmWC

mmWC

mmWC --

0

0

C

C

0

0

C

--

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 5 OF 71

REMARKS

23

REVISION

22

SCOPE

21

CABLE CONNECTION

20

INST_END_ CONN

19


18

MODEL

17

MAKE

16

CONT.ACTION

15

UNIT OF SEC. INST

14

SET POINT

13

FUNCTION

12


11


10

UNIT OF OTHERS

9

MAX. OTHERS.

8

OP. OTHERS.

7

UNIT OF TEMP.

6

MAX.TEMP

5

OP.TEMP

4

UNIT OF PRESS

3

TYPE OF INST

2

TAG-3

1

BCR 590



19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33 34

35

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

01

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

126 HBK40

001

PT

PR. AT RH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

127 HBK40

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT RH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

128 HBK40

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT RH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

01

TYPE OF INST

REVISION

--

C


C

0

MODEL

0

945

MAKE

1060

941

CONT.ACTION

1058

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

mm WC mm WC

UNIT OF PY. INST

-5 -8

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

-5 -8

MAX.PRESS

---

QTY / BOILER 1 1

MEDIUM FLUE GAS FLUE GAS

DESCRIPTION TEMP. AT PSH O/L-R PR. AT RH O/L -L

TAG-3

TE PP

TAG-2

001 401

TAG-1

CT

SL. NO.

124 HBK35 125 HBK40

129 HBK45

401

PP

PR. AT RH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

130 HBK45

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT RH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

131 HBK45

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT RH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-8

-8

mm WC

941

945

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

132 HBK50

401

PP

PR. AT LTSH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

133 HBK50

001

PT

PR. AT LTSH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

134 HBK50

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

135 HBK50

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L -L

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

01

136 HBK55

401

PP

PR. AT LTSH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

137 HBK55

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

--

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

-0

C

-0

C

-0

C

-0

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

138 HBK55

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT LTSH O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

-15

-16

mm WC

748

750

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

139 HNA10

401

PP

PR. AT ECO O/L - L

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

140 HNA10

CQ

401

AP

ANAL. AT ECO O/L - L

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

141 HNA10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT ECO O/L- L

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

3.54

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-32

142 HNA10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT ECO O/L- L

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

143 HNA15

401

PP

PR. AT ECO O/L - R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

144 HNA15

001

PT

PR. AT ECO O/L-R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

145 HNA15

CQ

401

AP

ANAL. AT ECO O/L - R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

146 HNA15

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT ECO O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

147 HNA30

401

PP

PR. AT ECO O/L - R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

148 HNA30

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT ECO O/L -R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

149 HNA30

001

PT

PR. AT ECO O/L-R

FLUE GAS

1

-66

-68

mm WC

302

304

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

150 HNA10

CQ

001

AT

O2 ANAL AT SAH - A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

151 HNA10

CQ

401

AP

ANAL AT SAH A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

T

--

% BY DRY VOL --

% BY DRY VOL --

152 HNA10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT SAH-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

153 HNA10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT SAH-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

154 HNA10

401

PP

PR. AT SAH-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

155 HNA15

CQ

001

AT

O2 ANAL AT SAH - B I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

3.54

--

--

--

--

T

--

C

--

--

--

D/I

--

156 HNA15

CQ

402

AP

ANAL. AT SAH - B I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

157 HNA15

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT SAH B I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

GO TO INDEX

--

3.54

--

--

--

0

0

--

---

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

--

---

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

E

00

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

E

00

4-97-288-91552 --

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

% BY DRY VOL % BY

% BY DRY VOL % BY

--

---

--

--

E

00

DRY VOL 0 C

DRY VOL 0 C

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

C

---

--

--

4-97-288-91552 --

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 6 OF 71

REMARKS

18

SCOPE

17

CABLE CONNECTION

16

INST_END_ CONN

15

UNIT OF SEC. INST

14

SET POINT

13

FUNCTION

12


11


10

UNIT OF OTHERS

9

MAX. OTHERS.

8

OP. OTHERS.

7

UNIT OF TEMP.

6

MAX.TEMP

5

OP.TEMP

4

UNIT OF PRESS

3

OP.PRESS

2

LINE SIZE

1

BCR 590



21

22

23

24

25

26

27

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

0

TYPE OF INST

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

--

--

UNIT OF PY. INST

--

C

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

C

0

MAX.TEMP

0

MAX.PRESS

mm WC mm WC

OP.PRESS

-73 -73

LINE SIZE

-71 -71

QTY / BOILER 1 1


DESCRIPTION TEMP. AT SAH - B I/L PR. AT AH - B I/L

TAG-3

TP PP

TAG-2

402 402

TAG-1

CT

SL. NO.

158 HNA15 159 HNA15

29

30

31

32

33 34

35

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00 00

160 HNA30

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT PAH I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

161 HNA30

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT PAH I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

162 HNA30

402

PP

PR. AT PAH I/L

FLUE GAS

1

-71

-73

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

163 HNA35

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT PAH O/L

FLUE GAS

2

2400 X 2500

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00 00

0

C

C

0

---

28

0

--

164 HNA35

CT

401-402

TP

TEMP. AT PAH O/L

FLUE GAS

2400 X 2 2500

165 HNA35

401

PP

PR. AT PAH O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2400 X 2500

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

166 HNA35

001

PT

PR. AT PAH O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2400 X 2500

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

167 HNA20

001

PT

PR. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

168 HNA20

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

2

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

169 HNA20

401

PP

PR. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

170 HNA20

CT

401-402

TP

TEMP. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

2

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

% BY DRY VOL mmWC

% BY DRY VOL mmWC

--

---

--

4-97-288-91552 --

00

0

C

0

--

--

C

--

--

171 HNA20

CQ

001

AT

O2 ANAL AT SAH - A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

D/I

--

172 HNA25

001

PT

PR. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

173 HNA25

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

2

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

174 HNA25

401

PP

PR. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

175 HNA25

CT

401-402

TP

TEMP. AT SAH-A O/L

FLUE GAS

2

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

176 HNA25

CQ

001

AT

O2 ANAL AT SAH - A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

-176

-179

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

D/I

--

---

--

4-97-288-91552 --

--

E

00

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,C

--

% BY DRY VOL 0 C

--

C

% BY DRY VOL 0 C

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

3.54

--

3.54

--

0

C

0

---

C

--

--

--

E

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

--

--

--

00

--

--

-

00

-176

-179

mm WC

0

--

-224

-228

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

1

--

-224

-228

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

177 HNA37

CT

001-002

TE

TEMP. AT AH O/L COMMON DUCT

FLUE GAS

2

178 HNA40

401

PP

ESP -A -ADD FIELD I/L GATE BLOWER PR.

FLUE GAS

1

FLUE GAS

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-33

179 HNA45

401

PP

ESP -B -ADD FIELD I/L GATE BLOWER PR.

180 HNA50

401

PP

ESP -A -ADD FIELD O/L GATE BLOWER PR.

FLUE GAS

1

--

-249

-253

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

181 HNA55

401

PP

ESP -B -ADD FIELD 0/L GATE BLOWER PR.

FLUE GAS

1

--

-249

-253

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

182 HNC10

401

PP

ESP -A -EXIST FIELD O/L GATE BLOWER PR.

FLUE GAS

1

--

-249

-253

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

183 HNC20

401

PP

ESP -B -EXIST FIELD 0/L GATE BLOWER PR.

FLUE GAS

1

--

-249

-253

mm WC

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

00

184 HNC10

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT IDF-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

E

00

185 HNC10

001

PT

PR. AT IDF-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

186 HNC10

402

PP

PR. AT IDF-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

187 HNC10

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT IDF-A I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

188 HNC20

CT

001

TE

TEMP. AT IDF-B I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

GO TO INDEX

0

C

-0

C

0

-0

--

C

C

---

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

--

00

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

E

00

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 7 OF 71

REMARKS

20

REVISION

19

SCOPE

18

CABLE CONNECTION

17

INST_END_ CONN

16


15

MODEL

14

MAKE

13

CONT.ACTION

12

UNIT OF SEC. INST

11

SET POINT

10

FUNCTION

9


8


7

UNIT OF OTHERS

6

MAX. OTHERS.

5

OP. OTHERS.

4

UNIT OF TEMP.

3

OP.TEMP

2

UNIT OF PRESS

1

BCR 590



20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

191 HNC20

CT

401

TP

TEMP. AT IDF-B I/L

FLUE GAS

1

3250 X 2520

-329

-336

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

192 HNC10

CT

002

TE

TEMP. AT IDF - A MTR-A NDE

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

193 HNC10

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT IDF MTR-A NDE

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

194 HNC10

CT

003014

TE

TEMP. AT IDF - A MTR-A WNDG

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

195 HNC10

CT

015

TE

TEMP. AT IDF-A MTR-A DE

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

TYPE OF INST

196 HNC10

CT

502

TI


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

197 HNC10

CT

016

TE

TEMP. AT IDF-A DE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

198 HNC10

CT

503

TI


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

TE

TEMP. AT IDF-A NDE BRG.

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

RANGE_OF_ SEC_INST

C

0

UNIT OF PY. INST

0

RANGE_ OF_PY_ INST.

150 150

OP.TEMP 138 138

UNIT OF PRESS mm WC mm WC

MAX.PRESS -336 -336

OP.PRESS -329 -329

LINE SIZE 3250 X 2520 3250 X 2520

QTY / BOILER 1 1


DESCRIPTION PR. AT IDF-B I/L PR. AT IDF-B I/L

TAG-3

PT PP

TAG-2

001 402

TAG-1

SL. NO.

189 HNC20 190 HNC20

--

00

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

0

0

C

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

--

0

C

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

0

C


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

202 HNC20

CT

501

TI

TEMP. AT IDF MTR-A NDE

METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

203 HNC20

CT

003014

TE

TEMP. AT IDF - A MTR-A WNDG

METAL

12

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

T=T+5/T+1 0

204 HNC20

CT

015

TE


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I,A, N

205 HNC20

CT

502

TI


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

206 HNC20

CT

016

TE


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

207 HNC20

CT

503

TI


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

208 HNC20

CT

017

TE


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

209 HNC20

CT

504

TI


METAL

1

--

--

--

--

T

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

L/ I

--

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

00

--

0

TEMP. AT IDF - A MTR-A NDE

--

--

--

TI

00

--

--

L/ I

TE

E

--

---

T=T+5/T+1 0

002

--

4-97-288-91550 4-97-288-91551

D/I,A, N

504

--

---

0

CT

4-97-288-91550 --

--

C

CT

0

0

C

-0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

T=T+5/T+1 0

0

C

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

0

C

D/I,A, N 77 / 82

0

C

0

L/ I

0

---

C

--

0

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

C

--

--

--

--

---

--

--

R

00

--

--

--

--

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

--

0

210 HNC10

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

--

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

211 HNC10

CQ

401

AP

ANAL TEST PKT AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

--

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-34

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

--

4-97-288-91551

--

--

-

00

--

4-97-288-91552

--

--

-

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

E

00

4-97-288-91550

--

--

--

00

4-97-288-91552

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91552

--

--

E

00

--

4-97-288-91552

--

--

E

00

212 HNC10

002

PT

PR. AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

2520 X 1 3250

213 HNC10

405

PP

PR. AT IDF-A O/L GATE BLOWER

FLUE GAS

1

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

214 HNC20

CT

402

TP

TEMP. AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

215 HNC20

CQ

401

AP

ANAL TEST PKT AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

--

--

216 HNC20

002

PT

PR. AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mmWC

mmWC

--

217 HNC20

405

PP

PR. AT IDF-A O/L GATE BLOWER

FLUE GAS

1

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

--

--

--

T

--

--

--

218 HNC10

CQ

001

AT

DUST MONITOR AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

22

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

PPM

PPM

--

219 HNC10

CQ

002-004

AT

SOX/NOX/CO ANAL AT IDF-A O/L

FLUE GAS

3

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

22

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

PPM

PPM

220 HNC20

CQ

001

AT

DUST MONITOR AT IDF-B O/L

FLUE GAS

1

2520 X 3250

25

26

mm WC

138

150

0

C

600/405

--

--

--

--

D/I

--

mg/Nm3

ppm

GO TO INDEX

--

--

--

--

35

--

0

201 HNC20

33 34

--

T=T+5/T+1 0

200 HNC10

32

--

C

017

31

--

0

CT

30

C

C

199 HNC10

29

---

--

0

L/ I

28

--

--

--

--

DRG.NO.4-97-288-91646/01 SHEET 8 OF 71

REMARKS

19

REVISION

18

SCOPE

17

CABLE CONNECTION

16

INST_END_ CONN

15


14

MODEL

13

MAKE

12

CONT.ACTION

11

UNIT OF SEC. INST

10

SET POINT

9

FUNCTION

8


7


6

UNIT OF OTHERS

5

MAX. OTHERS.

4

OP. OTHERS.

3

UNIT OF TEMP.

2

MAX.TEMP

1

BCR 590


Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited High Pressure Boiler Plant, Tiruchirapalli- 620 014

Controls & Instrumentation / FB PROJECT: BHATINDA-R&M 2 X 120 MW, CUST. NO: 4006 & 4007 - UNIT - 3 & 4. RECOMMENDED WRITE-UP ON BOILER AUTO CONTROL SYSTEMS THE FOLLOWING CONTROL LOOP DESCRIPTIONS ARE COVERED IN THIS WRITE UP.

Dwg No.

Sl.No

Description

01

FEEDWATER CONTROL[DRUM LEVEL CONTROL]

02

COMBUSTION CONTROL

03

FUEL FLOW CONTROL

04

AIR FLOW CONTROL

05

FURNACE DRAFT CONTROL

4-97-096-91711

06

PRIMARY AIR HEADER PRESSURE CONTROL

4-97-096-91712

07

MILL OUTLET TEMPERATURE & MILL AIRFLOW CONTROL

4-97-096-91713

08

SUPERHEATER AND REHEATER STEAM TEMPERATURE CONTROL-1 & 2

09

AIR HEATER COLD TEMP. CONTROL (SCAPH CONTROL)

4-97-096-91716

HOPCV & HOTCV CONTROLS [PUMP HOUSE] LOFCV, HOTCV & ASPRV CONTROLS [BOILER FRONT]

4-97-096-91717

AIRHEATER OUTLET TEMPERATURE CONTROL

4-97-096-91719

10 11 12

BCR NO: 503

4-97-096-91707 4-97-096-91708 4-97-096-91709 4-97-096-91710

4-97-096-91714 4-97-096-91715

4-97-096-91718

INTERNAL CIRCUALTION ONLY

PREPARED

Deva Kumar P

08.09.07

CHECKED

R.Priya Kala

08.09.07

APPROVED

E.S.Salai Kuberan

08.09.07

Write up on boiler auto controls

GO TO INDEX

Rev

00

PAGE 1 OF 6

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-35

Project: Bhatinda-R&M, Units# 3& 4, 2x 120 MW


Controls & Instrumentation / FB

Write up on boiler auto controls

01. FEED WATER CONTROL (DRUM LEVEL CONTROL) The objective of this control system is to maintain the drum level to the normal water level of the drum at all loads. At lower loads (less than 30% MCR), the start up feed control valve will be used and at higher loads Main full load feed control valve is used as final control element. If the Main full load feed control valve is taken for maintenance, standby feed control valve will be used. Drum level is measured by three transmitters on left and right side respectively through temperature compensated constant head unit. The pressure compensated drum level signal may be selected by “Mid value Auto Selection” circuit for control. Low load: The drum level measured signal is compared with the drum level set point. The error signal will have a proportional, integral and differential action in the single element controller. This controller output will be the position demand signal for the start up feed control valve. Auto/manual switching facility in DCS is provided for auto/manual selection and operation. Position indication shall be provided for the start up feed control valve in DCS. High load: At higher loads the start up control valve shall be closed. The steam flow shall be measured. In order to prevent sudden response due to drum swell and shrink on load change, a time lag unit shall be included in the steam flow signal. The temperature compensated feed water flow signal is computed by adding feed water flow at economizer inlet and super heater spray water flow. The error signal produced between drum level measured signal and drum level set point shall have proportional, integral and differential action in the three-element drum level controller. This will be added with steam flow signal, which is the feed water flow demand signal (set point for feed water flow). This will be compared with the feed water flow in the feed water controller. Deviation if any will have a proportional and integral action in the feed water controller. This controller output will be the position demand signal for the full load control valve. Auto/manual switching facility in DCS is provided for auto/manual selection and operation. Position indicator shall be provided in DCS for the motor driven BFP hydraulic coupling scoop position indication. NOTE: - Applicability of feed water DP control for Boiler Feed Control Valve has to be decided by EDN in consultation with PSEB. 02. COMBUSTION CONTROL The objective of this control is to maintain the turbine throttle pressure constant at the desired value by adjusting the firing rate (both fuel flow and airflow). Turbine throttle pressure may be measured with three transmitters. “Mid value Auto Selection” of the three transmitter shall be selected for control. The selected signal is compared with the set point and any error will have proportional and integral action. A proportional value of total steam flow and derivative of drum pressure signal are taken as feed forward feature for the control. An auto/manual switching facility in DCS is provided. The output of a/m switching facility is the airflow demand and fuel flow demand signal. Refer the 'Notes' in the control scheme for interlocks. 03.FUEL FLOW CONTROL Fuel flow demand from combustion control and air flow signal from air flow control corrected for fuel air ratio are compared and the lower is selected for the set point of the fuel flow controller (lead-lag system). This is to ensure that under any circumstance the fuel flow should be lesser than the airflow. Fuel flow is measured by adding the feed signal of the feeders (or mills) in service and the light oil flow corrected for calorific value. The feeder speed/rate measured signal is hooked up to the control after a delay to suit the process lag. The actual fuel flow signal is compared with the developed set point signal above and any deviation will have proportional and integral action. The controller's output signal is the position demand signal for feeder speed regulating device. Bias facility is to be provided in DCS to modify the signal whenever required. An auto/manual switching facility in DCS is provided for each feeder. PAGE 2 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4 – 97 – 096 – 91704 / 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-36




Write up on boiler auto controls To ensure air rich furnace at all times, a maximum deviation limit system (MDL) is used. I.e. whenever the fuel flow is more than the airflow this will automatically reduce the fuel flow and increase airflow to a safe value and both the airflow and fuel flow control is transferred to manual. 04. AIR FLOW CONTROL The secondary airflow is measured at left and right side of the secondary air ducts to wind box by means of aerofoils. Each flow will have temperature compensation. The flow is linearised by means of square root extractors. The total PA flow measured for each mill in service is added to obtain total airflow to the boiler. This signal is compared with the developed set point. The airflow demand from combustion control and actual fuel flow whichever is high (lead lag system) is selected to ensure enriched combustion air. The oxygen in the flue gas at the inlet of AH is measured as primary or redundant. Transfer switch can be selected for either average value or individual value. This signal is compared with excess air set point and any error will have proportional and integral action to have better combustion efficiency. High/low limiters are used to limit the value in case the oxygen analyzer is out of service. Under any circumstance the airflow should not be less than 30% MCR flow. This signal is the developed set point and the airflow signals will have proportional and integral action in the airflow controller. This position demand signal will be selected to the corresponding FD fans in service through' auto/manual switching facility provided in DCS. To have equal loading of FD fans the FD fan motors current is measured. The difference is used for taking corrective action. The corrected signal is used to position the FD fan-regulating damper. Necessary interlock from FSSS, Boiler auxiliaries interlock system Maximum Deviation Limit (MDL) etc. is provided. Separate auto/manual-switching facility in DCS and position indicator for each FD fan-regulating devices are provided. 05. FURNACE DRAFT CONTROL The main objective of the control is to maintain the furnace pressure constant at the desired set value at all loads. This is achieved by changing the flow of flue gas by modulating the inlet damper and varying Three transmitters measure furnace pressure. One signal is selected by mid value auto selection circuit for control. Excessive furnace pressure is monitored for directional block on Induced Draft (ID) and Forced Draft (FD) fans. Furnace pressure is compared with set point and error, will have proportional and integral action. Fuel demand signal is added as a feed forward feature. Master Fuel Trip (MFT) feed forward feature is provided to minimize negative furnace pressure excursion. Separate auto/manual-switching facility and the position indicator in DCS for each ID fan regulating devices are provided. To have equal loading of the ID fans each ID fan motor current (sum of channel 1 and channel 2 current) is measured averaged and compared. The difference is used for taking corrective action. The corrected signal is used to position the ID fan inlet damper. The ID fan inlet damper positions between a maximum and a minimum position limit for optimized control action. If ID fan position goes outside these limits, an error signal goes to a controller, whose output is used to vary fan speed to bring back the inlet damper within the set limits. 06. PRIMARY AIR HEADER PRESSURE CONTROL The main objective of this control is to adjust the primary air header pressure according to the feeder speed. That is, out of all the feeders, the feeder speed, which is higher than that of others is considered as set value for this control. Primary air header pressure is measured with three transmitters. One signal is selected by mid value auto selection circuit for control. The measured signal is compared with the selected feeder speed signal Through a high signal selector to maintain the minimum header pressure. Deviation if any will have proportional and integral action. Separate auto/manual-switching facility and position indicator is provided for each Primary Air (PA) fan-regulating device in DCS.To have equal loading of two running PA fans, the PA fans motor current is measured, averaged and compared. The difference is used for taking corrective action. The corrective signal is used to position the PA fan-regulating unit. PAGE 3 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4 – 97 – 096 – 91704 / 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-37




Write up on boiler auto controls 07. MILL OUTLET TEMPERATURE AND MILL AIRFLOW CONTROL The objective of this control system is to adjust the mill airflow according to the feeder speed and to maintain the mill outlet temperature at the constant set value. Mill airflow is maintained by adjusting the hot air regulating damper while the mill outlet temperature is maintained constant by adjusting the cold air-regulating damper. The temperature compensated mill airflow is linearised by the square root extractor. This airflow signal is compared with variable airflow set point as a function of feeder speed. Any error between these two signals will have proportional plus integral action. Rate of change of fuel demand signal is added to provide feed forward feature. An auto/manual switching facility in DCS with position indicator is provided. The mill outlet temperature is compared with constant set point and error will have proportional, integral and derivative action. An auto/manual switching facility in DCS with position indicator is provided.

08. SUPER HEATER/REHEATER STEAM TEMPERATURE CONTROL General Steam temperature control is provided by a combination of burner nozzle tilt positioning and Super-heater (SH), Reheater (RH) de-superheating spray. Steam temperature is maintained by allowing nozzle tilt to respond to the lower of either SH or RH outlet temperature, with spray responding to the higher. Auto manual switching facility in DCS is to be provided for modulating the following 1 SH spray water control valve 2 RH spray water control valve – left 3 RH spray water control valve - right 4 Burner tilt power cylinder. The Temperature measurement is selected by mid valve Auto selection (MVAS) control circuit. SH spray water valve control In the automatic mode, each SH spray water valve is controlled by a cascade control. Under normal conditions SH outlet temperature (Tsho), the primary controlled variable, is in the outer loop of the cascade control for valve; SH Desuper heater (DESH) outlet temperature (Tshdso), an index of the immediate effect of spray valve operation, is in the inner loop. The outer loop PID controller receives an error signal equal to the deviation of Tsho set point and measured final SH outlet temperature (Tshol and Tshor). The Tsho set point is programmed as a function of unit steam flow for constant pressure operation. The outer loop controller establishes a set point for the SH DESH outlet temp. This set point is compared to measured Tshdso and the resulting error is used to position the SH spray valve control. These feed forwards are needed to compensate for over firing and under firing which may be required initially. When changing unit load, feed forward signals are utilized as follows (using unit load increase as an example): 1. The rate of change of fuel demand increase (an indication of over firing) is used to open the SH spray valves to counter the initial temperature rise. PAGE 4 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4 – 97 – 096 – 91704 / 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-38




Write up on boiler auto controls 2. Drum pressure and steam flow (applied inversely) to spray valve demand) and tilt position (applied directly) are used as an index to recognize the tendency for temp. To drop after item-1 above occurs, and is used to close the SH spray valves to counter the subsequent temperature drop. Interlocks are provided to close the SH spray valves at loads less than 20% MCR. RH spray water valve control In the automatic mode, each RH DESH spray water valve is controlled by a cascade control. Under normal operating conditions RH outlet temperature (Trho), the primary controlled variable is in the outer loop of each cascade control; RH DESH outlet temperature (Trhdso), an index of the immediate effect of spray valve operation, is in the inner loop. The outer loop PID controller receives an error signal final RH outlet temperature (Trhol and Trhor). The Trho set point is programmed against the main steam flow curve, for constant pressure operation. The outer loop controller output is modified with tilt position to establish a set point for the RH DESH outlet temperature. This set point is compared to measure Trhdso, and the resulting error is used to position the associated RH DESH spray water valve. Interlocks are provided to keep the spray valves closed at loads less than 20% MCR. Nozzle tilt control The average Tsho and Trho error signals are compared and the greater of the two errors (i.e., the lower of the two temperatures) is selected for nozzle tilt control. An interlock is provided to keep the tilts at their base (horizontal) position at loads less than 25% MCR. If any spray water valve opens fully, the tilt control is interlocked to disallow further raising of the tilts, and thus prevent possible over heating of the SH and RH outlet lead. Refer notes in control scheme for interlocks.

09. AIR HEATER COLD END TEMPERATURE CONTROL [SCAPH] The purpose of this control loop is to maintain the cold end temperature above the dew point thus preventing condensation and resultant corrosion of air-heater surfaces. The cold end temperature of AH. I.e. Sec Air Temp at APH inlet and Flue gas Temp at Air PH outlet is measured using 3 TE’s placed at APH inlet and Outlet respectively is measured and averaged. The average temperature is compared with the set point and any deviation will have proportional and integral action. An auto/manual switching facility in DCS with position indicator is provided. The operation of this control may be required while lighting up and low load operation of the boiler.

10. HEAVY OIL PRESSURE CONTROL – PER BOILER Heavy oil flow is regulated by maintaining the pressure at pump outlet. Two pressure transmitters are used to measure the pressure and the healthy signal is applied to the controller where it is compared with the set point. The error signal will have proportional & integral action in the controller. The controller output is the position demand signal for pressure control valve of heavy oil. 10.1 HEAVY FUEL OIL TEMPERATURE CONTROL – PER BOILER The purpose of the control is to maintain HFO temperature. The HFO is heated with the help of steam. The temperature after heater set is measured into primary and redundant transmitters. Deviation is alarmed and the controller is tripped to manual. The selected signal is compared with the set point. The error will have proportional and integral action. The controller output will be the position demand signal for the temperature control valve located PAGE 5 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4 – 97 – 096 – 91704 / 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-39




Write up on boiler auto controls in the fuel oil line. Auto/manual station is provided for auto/manual selection for operation. Position indication is provided for the heavy fuel oil temperature control valve.

11. LIGHT OIL FLOW CONTROL [BOILER FRONT] Light oil flow is regulated by maintaining the pressure at pump outlet. Two pressure transmitters are used to measure the pressure and the healthy signal is applied to the controller where it is compared with the set point. The error signal will have proportional & integral action in the controller. The controller output is the position demand signal for pressure control valve of light oil. 11.1. HEAVY FUEL OIL FLOW CONTROL [BOILER FRONT] The purpose of the control system is to maintain the required HFO flow by maintaining constant pressure in the header. The pressure after flow control valve is measured with primary and redundant transmitters. Deviation is alarmed and the controller is tripped to manual. The selected signal is compared with the set point. The error will have proportional and integral action. The controller output will be the position demand signal for the flow control valve located in the fuel oil line. Auto/manual station is provided for auto/manual selection for operation. Position indication is provided for the heavy fuel oil flow control valve. 11.2. ATOMISING STEAM PRESSURE CONTROL [BOILER FRONT] The purpose of the control system is to maintain the pressure of atomizing steam line at the required value. The atomizing steam pressure is measured with primary and redundant transmitters. Deviation is alarmed and the controller is tripped to manual. The selected signal is compared with the set point. The error will have proportional and integral action. The controller output will be the position demand signal for the atomizing pressure control valve. Auto/manual station is provided for auto/manual selection. Position indication is provided for the atomizing pressure control valve.

12. AH OUTLET TEMPERATURE CONTROL (HOT GAS DAMPER CONTROL) This loop is used to equalise primary and secondary airheater gas outlet temperatures. This serves to reduce gas temperature imbalances (stratification) at ID fan and increases unit efficiency. In the automatic mode , average primary and secondary airheater gas outlet temperatures are compared and the resulting signal is received by a PI controller. The controller output is received by two function generators, whose output determine damper position. A limit is provided to maintain damper operator between a specified minimum and full open position. An alarm is activated if dampers reach their minimum position. When a temperature difference is sensed, the controller output will change and the damper controlling the hotter gas outlet will begin to close while the damper controlling the colder gas outlet remain open. (see function generator on the reference drawing) the resultant redistribution of hot gas will serve to equalise the outlet temperatures. With this scheme one damper (that controlling the colder outlet) will always fully open while the other damper modulates between its minimum and full open position. In manual control, dampers are to be initialised by the operator at 100 % open position. A signal indicating that both dampers are fully open is to be interlocked into the ID fan start logic as a start permissive. Transfers are designed to be bumpless. If control power supply is lost dampers are to lock in position or to be forced fully open.

Refer notes in auto control scheme for interlocks & final control elements.

PAGE 6 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4 – 97 – 096 – 91704 / 00

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-40

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-41

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-43

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-44

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-45

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-46

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-47

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-48

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-49

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-50

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-51

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-52

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-53

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-54

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-55

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-56

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-57

GO TO INDEX

PROJECT-Gurunanak TPS [Bhatinda R&M] CAPACITY- 2 X 120 MW. UNITS # 3 &4 CUSTOMER : Punjab State Electricity Board. CUST NO. 4006&4007

Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02

01

P

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

REG

REMARKS

U

REVISION

01

SCOPE OF ACTUATOR (INTERNAL USE)

FD FAN A BLADE PITCH CONTROL

LOCATION

HLB 10 AA 101

POSITION TRANSMITTER FOR R.ACT.(Y/N)

1

SOLENOID VALVE (YES(Y) / NO(N))

6

I/P CONVERTOR SCOPE FOR REG. ACT. (E - BHELEDN)

ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)

5

ACTION ON LOSS OF SIGNAL (FAIL OPEN-FO /FAIL CLOSE-FC /STAYPUTSP)

UNIT(U)/STN(S)

4

ACTION ON LOSS OF POWER AIR (FAIL OPENFO /FAIL CLOSE-FC /STAYPUT-SP)

QUANTITY

3

ACTION - AIR TO OPEN(AO)/ AIR TO CLOSE (AC)

DESCRIPTION

2

OPERN (O/C, REG., INCH.)

KKS TAG NO.

1

14

15

16

17

18

19

Y

NEAR FD FAN-A BET S19 & S20

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

AIR FLOW CONTROL

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

AIR FLOW CONTROL

FOR PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS

ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

SL NO

TYPE OF

CONTROLLED FROM

SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-58

2

HLB 20 AA 101

FD FAN B BLADE PITCH CONTROL

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR FD FAN-B BET S22 & S23

3

HLA 10 AA 001

FD FAN A OUTLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

NEAR FD FAN-A BET S19 & E, C&I/Ranipet. S20

02

4

HLA 20 AA 001

FD FAN B OUTLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

NEAR FD FAN-B BET S22 & E, C&I/Ranipet. S23

02

5

HLA 10 AA 002

SCAPH A BY DAMPER

01

U

01

E

INCH

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

Y

EL 9000 BET S19 & S20

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

REMOTE MANUAL

6

HLA 20 AA 002

SCAPH B BY DAMPER

01

U

01

E

INCH

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

Y

EL 9000 BET S22 & S23

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

REMOTE MANUAL

7

HLA 11 AA 001

SCAPH A INLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 9000 BET S19 & S20

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

8

HLA 21 AA 001

SCAPH B INLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 9000 BET S22 & S23

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

9

HLA 11 AA 002

SCAPH A OUTLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 9000 BET S19 & S20

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

10 HLA 21 AA 002

SCAPH B OUTLET DAMPER

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 9000 BET S22 & S23

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

11 HLA 10 AA 003

AIR HEATER - A INLET DAMPER - SEC. AIR

Deleted

E, C&I/Ranipet.

01

12 HLA 20 AA 003

AIR HEATER - B INLET DAMPER - SEC. AIR

Deleted

E, C&I/Ranipet.

01

HHL 11,12,13,14 AA 501

WIND BOX SEC.AIR DAMPER ELEVATION AA

04

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

HHL 11,12,13,14 14 AA 111,112,113,114

WIND BOX SEC.AIR DAMPER ELEVATION AB,BC,CD,DD

16

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

WIND BOX OFA DAMPER ELEVATION OFAUPPER & LOWER

08

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

13

15

HHL 11,12,13,14 AA 115,116

--

---

EL 13600

FS/ TRICHY

02

SADC

N

AB - EL 14802 BC - EL 16152 CD - EL 17552 DD - EL 18717

FS/ TRICHY

02

SEC AIR DAMPER CONTROL

SADC

N

OFA- L- EL 18967 OFA-U -EL 19217

FS/ TRICHY

02


SHEET NO: 1 OF 6

GO TO INDEX


Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02

ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)







16

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

SADC

N

BTPS

04

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

---

DDCMIS

Y

SCANNER AIR EMERGENCY DAMPER

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

-

Y

FSSS

---

SCANNER AIR FAN INLET DAMPER

02

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

20 HHQ 40 AA 001

SCANNER AIR AUTO TRANSFER DAMPER

01

U

--

A

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

21 HFE 10 AA 101

PRIMARY AIR FAN A BLADE PITCH CONTROL DAMPER

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

22 HFE 20 AA 101

PRIMARY AIR FAN B BLADE PITCH CONTROL DAMPER

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

23 HFE 10 AA 001

PRIMARY AIR FAN A OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

24 HFE 20 AA 001

PRIMARY AIR FAN B OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

25 HFE 51 AA 501

COLD PRIMARY AIR GATE A

01

U

--

M

O/C

26 HFE 52 AA 501

COLD PRIMARY AIR GATE B

01

U

--

M

27 HFE 53 AA 501

COLD PRIMARY AIR GATE C

01

U

--

28 HFE 54 AA 501

COLD PRIMARY AIR GATE D

01

U

29 HFE 51 AA 101

COLD PRIMARY AIR DAMPER A

01

30 HFE 52 AA 101

COLD PRIMARY AIR DAMPER B

31 HFE 53 AA 101

02

REHEATER TEMP CONTROL

EL 13500 NR S16

FS/ TRICHY

02

---

EL 13500 NR S16

FS/ TRICHY

02

--

---

EL 13500 NR S16

FS/ TRICHY

02

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR PA FAN-A BET FH1&FH2

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

PRY AIR HEADER PRESSURE CONTROL

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR PA FAN-B BET FH2&FH3

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

PRY AIR HEADER PRESSURE CONTROL

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

NR S5 (MILL B)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

NR S1R (MILL C)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MILL TEMP CONTROL

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NR S5 (MILL B)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MILL TEMP CONTROL

COLD PRIMARY AIR DAMPER C

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NR S1R (MILL C)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MILL TEMP CONTROL

32 HFE 54 AA 101

COLD PRIMARY AIR DAMPER D

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MILL TEMP CONTROL

33 HFE 61 AA 201

HOT PRIMARY AIR GATE A

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

HBK 11,12,13,14 AA 101

18 HHQ 11 AA 001 19

HHQ 20 AA 501&502

A- EL 14187 B- EL 15477 C- EL 16777 D- EL 18237

NEAR PA FAN-A BET FH1&FH2 NEAR PA FAN-B BET FH2&FH3

REMARKS

FS/ TRICHY

17

LOCATION


HHL 11,12,13,14 16 AA 101, 102, 103, 104,

ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

02

KKS TAG NO.

FS/ TRICHY

SL NO

REVISION

UNIT(U)/STN(S)

WIND BOX SEC.AIR DAMPER ELEVATION D TO A


QUANTITY

CONTROLLED FROM


DESCRIPTION

TYPE OF


SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-59

SHEET NO: 2 OF 6

GO TO INDEX


Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S5 (MILL B)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

35 HFE 63 AA 201

HOT PRIMARY AIR GATE C

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S1R (MILL C)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

36 HFE 64 AA 201

HOT PRIMARY AIR GATE D

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

37 HFE 61 AA 101

HOT PRIMARY AIR DAMPER A

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MILL AIR FLOW CONTROL

38 HFE 62 AA 101

HOT PRIMARY AIR DAMPER B

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NR S5 (MILL B)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02


39 HFE 63 AA 101

HOT PRIMARY AIR DAMPER C

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NR S1R ((MILL C))

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02


40 HFE 64 AA 101

HOT PRIMARY AIR DAMPER D

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02


41 HFW 10 AA 101

DYNAVANE FILTER BLEED AIR DAMPER

01

U

01

P

REG

---

---

---

---

---

02

LOCAL PNUEMATIC CONTROLLER

HFW 11,12 42 AA 501

SEAL AIR FAN INLET DAMPER

02

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

43 HFW 20 AA 201

SEAL AIR AUTO TRANSFER DAMPER

01

U

--

A

O/C

---

---

-

---

---

--

---

44 HFW 21 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL A DAMPER

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

FS/ TRICHY

02

45 HFW 22 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL B DAMPER

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S5 (MILL B)

FS/ TRICHY

02

46 HFW 23 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL C DAMPER

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S1R (MILL C)

FS/ TRICHY

02

47 HFW 24 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL D DAMPER

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

FS/ TRICHY

02

48 HFW 31 AA 501

SEAL AIR TO COAL FEEDER A

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

EL 13200 NR FEEDER A

FS/ TRICHY

02

49 HFW 32 AA 501

SEAL AIR TO COAL FEEDER B

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

EL 13200 NR FEEDER B

FS/ TRICHY

02

50 HFW 33 AA 501

SEAL AIR TO COAL FEEDER C

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

EL 13200 NR FEEDER C

FS/ TRICHY

02

51 HFW 34 AA 501

SEAL AIR TO COAL FEEDER D

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

EL 13200 NR FEEDER D

FS/ TRICHY

02

52 HFE 31 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL A COAL PIPE

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

53 HFE 32 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL B COAL PIPE

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S5 (MILL B)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

54 HFE 33 AA 201

SEAL AIR TO MILL C COAL PIPE

01

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S1R (MILL C)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

--

---

MILL BAY C&D BET S13 &S FS/ TRICHY 9 MILL BAY C&D BET S13 &S FS/ TRICHY 9 MILL BAY C&D BET S13 &S FS/ TRICHY 9

KKS TAG NO.

REMARKS


---

REVISION


O/C



P

LOCATION


01


U


01

ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)

HOT PRIMARY AIR GATE B

DESCRIPTION

34 HFE 62 AA 201

SL NO

UNIT(U)/STN(S)

CONTROLLED FROM


QUANTITY

TYPE OF


SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

02 02

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-60

SHEET NO: 3 OF 6

GO TO INDEX


Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

56

HFE 61 AA 202 - 205

MILL A DISCHARGE DAMPER

04

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS1 (MILL A)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

57

HFE 62 AA 202 - 205

MILL B DISCHARGE DAMPER

04

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S5 (MILL B)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

58

HFE 63 AA 202 - 205

MILL C DISCHARGE DAMPER

04

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NR S1R (MILL C)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

59

HFE 64 AA 202 - 205

MILL D DISCHARGE DAMPER

04

U

01

P

O/C

---

---

---

Y

FSSS

---

NEAR DS3 (MILL D)

Mill Engg., Hyd

02

---

A- EL 14187 NR S1L CORNER1 A- EL 14187 NR S3L CORNER2 A- EL 14187 NR S3R CORNER3 A- EL 14187 NR S1RCORNER4

FS/ TRICHY

02

---

B- EL 15477 NR S1L CORNER1 B- EL 15477 NR S3L CORNER2 B- EL 15477 NR S3R CORNER3 B- EL 15477 NR S1RCORNER4

FS/ TRICHY

02

---

C- EL 16777NR S1L CORNER1 C- EL 16777NR S3L CORNER2 C- EL 16777NR S3R CORNER3 C- EL 16777NR S1RCORNER4

FS/ TRICHY

02

60

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-61

61

62

HFE 61 AA 501-504

HFE 62 AA 501-504

HFE 63 AA 501-504

COAL BURNER INLET GATE (MILL-A)

COAL BURNER INLET GATE (MILL-B)

COAL BURNER INLET GATE (MILL-C)

04

04

04

U

U

U

--

--

--

M

M

M

O/C

O/C

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

---

--

--

--

REMARKS

---

REVISION


O/C



P

LOCATION


CONTROLLED FROM


01


ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)

U


UNIT(U)/STN(S)

01

ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

QUANTITY

55 HFE 34 AA 201


SEAL AIR TO MILL D COAL PIPE

DESCRIPTION

KKS TAG NO.

SL NO

TYPE OF


SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

SHEET NO: 4 OF 6

GO TO INDEX


Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02

FS/ TRICHY

02

---

EL 14900 BET BAY B&C

FS/ TRICHY

02

--

---


FS/ TRICHY

02

--

---


FS/ TRICHY

02

Deleted

E, C&I/Ranipet.

01

Deleted

E, C&I/Ranipet.

01

04

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

64 HFB 01 AA 501

BUNKER A OUTLET GATE

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

---

65 HFB 02 AA 501

BUNKER B OUTLET GATE

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

--

66 HFB 03 AA 501

BUNKER C OUTLET GATE

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

67 HFB 04AA 501

BUNKER D OUTLET GATE

01

U

--

M

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

68 HNA 20 AA 001

SEC AIR HEATER A GAS OUTLET DAMPER

69 HNA 25 AA 001

SEC AIR HEATER B GAS OUTLET DAMPER

D- EL 18237NR S1L CORNER1 D- EL 18237NR S3L CORNER2 D- EL 18237NR S3R CORNER3 D- EL 18237NR S1RCORNER4

REMARKS


COAL BURNER INLET GATE (MILL-D)

63

LOCATION

02


FS/ TRICHY


REVISION

CONTROLLED FROM





ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)

UNIT(U)/STN(S)



HFE 64 AA 501-504

QUANTITY

DESCRIPTION

KKS TAG NO.

SL NO

TYPE OF


SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-62 SHEET NO: 5 OF 6

GO TO INDEX


Drg. no: 4-97-599-91584/02




P

REG

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 24600 NR AH3

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

71 HNA 40 AA 001

EP A -ADDITIONAL FIELDS- INLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 16670 NR K2

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

72 HNA 45 AA 001

EP B -ADDITIONAL FIELDS- INLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 16670 NR K4

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

73 HNA 50 AA 001

EP A -ADDITIONAL FIELDS- OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 16200 BET L1&L2

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

74 HNA 55 AA 001

EP B - ADDITIONAL FIELDS- OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 16200 BET L3&L4

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

75 HNC 10 AA 001

EP A - EXISTING FIELD - OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 14150 BET TI&T2

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

76 HNC 20 AA 001

EP B - EXISTING FIELD - OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 14150 BET T4&T5

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

77 HNC 10 AA 002

ID FAN A INLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 14150 BET UI&U2

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

78 HNA 20 AA 002

ID FAN B INLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 14150 BET U4&U5

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02


CI-FB/ TRICHY

02


NEAR ID FAN-A BET U1&U2 NEAR ID FAN-A BET U4&U5

REVISION

KKS TAG NO.

REMARKS


01



U

LOCATION


01

ACTUATOR (E/P/M/A)

ACT. PER DAMP (NO.)

PRI AIR HEATER GAS OUTLET DAMPER

DESCRIPTION

70 HNA 35 AA 001

SL NO

UNIT(U)/STN(S)

CONTROLLED FROM


QUANTITY

TYPE OF


SCHEDULE OF DAMPERS

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-63

79 HNC 10 AA 101

ID FAN A INLET DAMPER

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

80 HNC 20 AA 101

ID FAN B INLET DAMPER

01

U

01

P

REG

AO

SP

FC

E

N

DDCMIS

Y

81 HNC 10 AA 003

ID FAN A OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 6200 BET T1&T2

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

82 HNC 20 AA 003

ID FAN B OUTLET GATE

01

U

01

E

O/C

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 6200 BET T4&T5

E, C&I/Ranipet.

02

83 HNA 37 AA 001

SEC AIR HEATER A&B GAS OUTLET DAMPER IN COMMON DUCT

01

U

01

P

REG

---

---

---

---

---

DDCMIS

---

EL 19200

CI-FB/ TRICHY

02

MODIFIED

ADDED

SHEET NO: 6 OF 6

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-64

GO TO INDEX

BCR : 415

TYPE (NORMAL(N) / EMERGENCY(E))

STARTER TYPE (REVERSIBLE(R) / NONREVERSIBLE(NR))

STARTER SCOPE BOP-BHEL[BHOPAL] TRY-BHEL[TRICHY]

LOAD (NORMAL(N) / STANDY(S))

REVISION

0.37

DDCMIS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LOCAL STARTER BOX

NR

TRY

N

00

02

SCANNER AIR FAN AC MOTOR

01

3.70

FSSS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

NR

BOP

N

00

03

SCANNER AIR FAN DC MOTOR

01

3.70

FSSS

220 V DC

E

LOCAL STARTER BOX

NR

TRY

S

00

04

TRANSVERSE MOTORS FOR LRSB

20

0.37

SB

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

SBMCC

R

TRY

N

00

05

ROTARY MOTORS FOR LRSB

20

0.45

SB

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

SBMCC

NR

TRY

N

00

06

TRANSVERSE MOTOR FOR WB

40

0.45

SB

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

SBMCC

R

TRY

N

00

07

ROTARY MOTORS FOR WB

40

0.09

SB

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

SBMCC

NR

TRY

N

00

08

FD FAN A&B LUBE OIL PUMP MOTORS

04

3.70

DDCMIS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

NR

BOP

N

00

09

PA FAN A&B LUBE OIL PUMP MOTORS

04

2.20

DDCMIS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

NR

BOP

N

00

10

ID FAN O/L DAMPER BLOWER MOTOR

02

1.50

DDCMIS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

NR

BOP

N

00

11

SEAL AIR FAN MOTOR

02

37.00

FSSS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

NR

BOP

N

00

12

GRAVIMETRIC FEEDER MAIN MOTOR

04

7.50

FSSS

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

FEEDER REMOTE CONTROL CABINET

NR

TRY

N

00

13

GRAVIMETRIC FEEDER CLEAN OUT CONVEYOR MOTOR

04

1.50


415V,3PH,50HZ

N


NR

N

00

14

SPARE FEEDERS

02

3.70

--

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

--

BOP

N

00

15

SPARE FEEDERS

01

15.00

--

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

LTMCC

--

BOP

N

00

SPEED (RPM)

SL NO

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-65

GO TO INDEX

SOURCE

VOLTAGE

01

CONTROLLED FROM

FURNACE TEMP. PROBE MOTOR

FLC (AMP)

RATING (KW)

01

DESCRIPTION

QTY (NO)/BLR

POWER SUPPLY

TRY

REMARKS

SCHEDULE OF LT MOTORS (PRELIMINARY)

Project - GURUNANAK TPS [BHATINDA R&M] , Capacity - 2 X 120 MW. Unit # 3 &4 CUST : Punjab State Electricity board CUST NO. 4006&4007

DRG NO : 4-97-599-91538 / 00 SHEET NO: 2 OF 2

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-66

GO TO INDEX

BCR NO: 617

SOURCE

STARTER TYPE(REVERSIBLE(R) / NONREVERSIBLE(NR)

INTEGRAL STARTER Y/N

STARTER / FEEDER SCOPE

POSITION TRANSMITTER. YES(Y) / NO(N)

CONTROLLED FROM

LOCATION

REVISION

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

Y

DDCMIS

EL 4500 NEAR S1R

02

2

HAN12AA051

DRUM CONTINUIOUS BLOW DOWN REG

1

K150

0.72

4.40

3.40

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

Y

DDCMIS

EL 13765 NEAR S5

02

3

HAN11AA051

DRUM EMERGENCY DRAIN - REG

1

SA30A32

1.10

5.72

2.90

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

Y

DDCMIS

EL 14000 NEAR S10

02

DDCMIS

EL 45300 BET S3L AND S4L

02

DDCMIS

EL38750 BET S1L AND S9

02 02

VOLTAGE

OLR (AMP)

FLC (AMP)

POWER SUPPLY RATING (KW)

QTY (NO)

KKS TAG NO

TYPE OF SERVOMOTOR

INTERMITTENT BLOW DOWN - REG

DESCRIPTION

HAN13AA051

SL NO

TYPE (NORMAL(N) / EMERGENCY(E)

SCHEDULE OF SERVOMOTORS

REMARKS


INCHING VALVES 1

4 5 6

HAN20AA051 LBA01AA051 LBA02AA051

SH START UP VENT - REG BY FOR MS LINE - REG-LEFT BY FOR MS LINE - REG-RIGHT

1 1

SA50E90 K300

4.00 1.20

26.00 6.70

9.00 4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ 415V,3PH,50HZ

N N

V&D LTMCC V&D LTMCC

R R

N N

BOP BOP

Y Y

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

Y

DDCMIS

EL38750 BET S1R AND S13

1

SA50E90

4.00

26.00

9.00

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL18500 NEAR S3R

02 02

ISOLATING ON / OFF VALVES 1

HAC10AA001

ECO INLET-ISOL

2

HAC10AA002

INTEGRAL BY FOR ECO INLET ISOL

1

SA3A16

0.06

0.38

0.29

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL18500 NEAR S3R

3

HAN13AA001

INTERMITTENT BLOW DOWN - ISOL

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL4500 NEAR S1R

02

4

HAC11AA001

ECO RECIRCULATION - ISOL

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL 20327 NEAR S7

02 02

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-67

5

HAN11AA001

DRUM EMERGENCY DRAIN -ISOL

1

SA50AB32

2.20

8.52

4.10

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL 14000 NEAR S10

6

HAN20AA001

PSH START UP VENT - ISOL

1

SA50E90

4.00

26.00

9.00

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL 45300 BET S3L AND S4L

02

DDCMIS

EL 35900 NEAR S10

02

DDCMIS

EL 35900 NEAR S16

02

DDCMIS


02 02

7 8 9

LBA01AA001 LBA02AA001 LBA01AA003

MS LINE DRAIN -ISOL [LEFT] MS LINE DRAIN -ISOL [RIGHT] MSL - ISOL [LEFT]

1 1 1

K30 K30 SMB2-60

0.09 0.09 4.80

0.90 0.90 10.40

0.60 0.60 11.00

415V,3PH,50HZ 415V,3PH,50HZ 415V,3PH,50HZ

N N N

V&D LTMCC V&D LTMCC V&D LTMCC

R R R

N N N

BOP BOP BOP

N N N

10

LBA02AA003

MSL - ISOL [RIGHT]

1

SMB2-60

4.80

10.40

11.00

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS


11

LBA01AA002

BY FOR MS LINE -ISOL [LEFT]

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS


02

DDCMIS


02

12

LBA02AA002

BY FOR MS LINE -ISOL [RIGHT]

1

K300

1.20

6.70

4.30

415V,3PH,50HZ

N

V&D LTMCC

R

N

BOP

N

DRG NO: 4-97-599-91191 / 02 SHEET NO : 2 of 3

GO TO INDEX

R

N

BOP

N

DDCMIS

EL41673 BET S3R AND S4R

02

REMARKS

REVISION

V&D LTMCC

LOCATION

N

CONTROLLED FROM

415V,3PH,50HZ

POSITION TRANSMITTER. YES(Y) / NO(N)

4.30

VOLTAGE

OLR (AMP)

FLC (AMP) 6.70

STARTER / FEEDER SCOPE

1.20

INTEGRAL STARTER Y/N

K300

STARTER TYPE(REVERSIBLE(R) / NONREVERSIBLE(NR)

1

RATING (KW)

TYPE OF SERVOMOTOR

QTY (NO)

DESCRIPTION SOOT BLOWER MAIN LINE - ISOL

POWER SUPPLY

SOURCE

HCB10AA001

BCR NO: 617

SCHEDULE OF SERVOMOTORS

TYPE (NORMAL(N) / EMERGENCY(E)

13

KKS TAG NO

SL NO


4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-68 DRG NO: 4-97-599-91191 / 02 SHEET NO : 3 of 3

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-69

GO TO INDEX

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-70

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-71

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-72

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-73

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-74

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-75

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-76

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-77

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-78

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-79

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-1-80

TAB - 2

GO TO INDEX

FSSS WRITE-UP, BHATINDA R & M , 2 x120 MW

BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LIMITED TIRUCHIRAPALLI-620 014 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION/FB

PUNJAB ELECTRICITY BOARD, GURUNANAK THERMAL POWER STATION (BHATINDA - R & M), Unit - 3 & 4, 2 x 120 MW CUST. Nos. 4006 & 4007

WRITE-UP ON

FURNACE SAFEGUARD SUPERVISORY SYSTEM

REVISION HISTORY

Rev. No.

Date

00

27-06-2007

01

15-11-2007

02

04-02-2008

Description Initial Release Revised as per Customer comments Revised to include Reference Drawings & Note

Prepared

Checked

Approved

S. Chandraleka

V.M. Selvaraaj

S. Ramachandran

-sd-

-sd-

-sd-

-sd-

-sd-

-sd-

Page 1 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-81


Reference Drawings :Sl. No.

Description of the system

Scheme of Air and Flue gas path with Instrumentation 2 Scheme of Pulveriser system with Instrumentation Fuel oil system LFO, HFO pumping (existing) & 3 Heating unit 4 Fuel oil system Boiler front arrangement 1

5 FSSS Logic diagram

6 Secondary air damper control systemLogic diagram 7 Write up on Secondary air damper control system

Drawing No. 0-97-288-90553 1-97-291-90237 0-00-056-10672 0-00-056-10673 3-95-094-16741 to 3-95-094-16780 3-95-194-16845 to 3-95-194-16852 --------

Page 2 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-82


IMPORTANT NOTE

This write up is meant for general guidelines and better understanding of the system. However, it may be noted that “All the logic conditions” spelt in English Language may not be exact equivalent of pictorial representation of logics. It is mandatory that the operating personal should refer to the respective contract logics. It must be recognized that no amount of written instruction can replace intelligent thinking and reasoning on the part of boiler operators, especially when coping with unforeseen operating conditions. It is operators’ responsibility to become thoroughly familiar, not only with immediate steam generating equipment but also with all pertinent control equipment. Satisfactory performance and safety depend to a great extent on proper functioning of controls and auxiliary equipment.

Page 3 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-83


KEY The logic sequences are represented in English as statements, which are to be executed in certain order of precedence as described below. The logical gates are represented in Upper case Letters, preceeded and followed by “dots”. eg.

.AND. ,

.OR.

The logical function combining two statements in the same line to be executed first. eg.

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .AND. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx

The logical function in the right most position is to be executed next and so on. eg. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .AND. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx The logical function at the left most position is executed last. eg. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .OR. xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx Both logical operators .AND.,.OR. have equal precedence between them.For better understanding the following example with mixed logical expressions is marked with the order of execution. eg. xxxxxxxxxxxxx .OR.5 xxxxxxxxxxxxx .AND.4 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .OR.1 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .AND.2 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx .OR.3 xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx NB: xxxxxxxxxxxx represent logical statements.

Page 4 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-84


CONTENTS : 1. Figures (Figure-1 to 8) 2. Introduction 3. Heavy Oil Recirculation valve control 4. Furnace Purge 5. Selection of Light Oil/Heavy Oil firing 6. Oil Protection (Triple Redundant) 7. Light Oil Trip Valve Control 8. Heavy Oil Trip Valve Control 9. Light Oil Elevation start (Elevation-AB, Pair mode) 10. Heavy Oil Elevation start (Elevation-AB & CD, Pair mode) 11. Elevation Mode Operation - (Typical for LO & HO firing) 12. Pulveriser Ignition Permit 13. Pulveriser Ready 14. Pulveriser Start 15. Pulveriser in Service 16. Mill Protection (Triple Redunant) 17. Pulversier Trip 18. Pulveriser Shut-down 19. Oil Elevation Shutdown (Pair mode, Elevation-AB, LO & HO)

Page 5 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-85


20. Oil Elevation Shutdown (Elevation mode, Elevation-AB, LO & HO) 21. Unit Protection (Triple Redundant) 22. Boiler Trip conditions 23. Scanner Air Fan Control 24. Seal Air Fan Control 25. Secondary Air Damper Control

-------ooOOoo-------

Page 6 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-86


Figure-1

HEA IGNITOR BHEL SCAN AIR DAMPER COAL + PRIMARY AIR HFO OIL GUN HFO+LFO OIL GUN MANUAL DAMPER AUX. AIR DAMPER FUEL AIR DAMPER OVER FIRE AIR DAMPER

Page 7 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-87


Page 8 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-88

GO TO INDEX


Page 9 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-89

GO TO INDEX


Page 10 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-90

GO TO INDEX


Page 11 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-91

GO TO INDEX


Page 12 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-92

GO TO INDEX


Page 13 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-93

GO TO INDEX


Page 14 of 42

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-94

GO TO INDEX


2.0 INTRODUCTION : The Furnace Safeguard Supervisory System (FSSS) is designed to ensure the execution of a safe, orderly operating sequence in the start up and shutdown of fuel firing equipment and to prevent errors of omission and commission in following such a safe operating procedure. The system provides protection, should there be a malfunction of fuel firing equipment and associated air systems. The safety features of the system are designed for protection in most common emergency situations. However the system cannot supplement the intelligence and the reasonable judgement of the operator in all the situations. In some phases of operation, the Furnace Safeguard Supervisory System provides permissive interlocks only to ensure safe start up sequence of equipment. Once the equipment is in service, the operator must use normally acceptable safe operating practices. It is important that the operator is familiar with the overall operation of the unit and the operation of individual equipments as outlined in the various equipment sections in this manual. It is essential that all parts of the Furnace Safeguard Supervisory System are in service at all times if the system is to provide protection for which it is designed. Proper maintenance and periodic inspection of the system and associated hardware is essential for continued reliable operation. This instruction section of the system gives a complete description of the Furnace Safeguard supervisory System furnished for this unit as it is related to the various operating phases and operation of the fuel firing equipment and associated air systems. Basically the system is designed to perform the following functions : •

Prevent any fuel firing unless a satisfactory furnace purge sequence has first been completed.

•

Prevent start-up of individual fuel firing equipment unless certain permissive interlocks have first been satisfied.

•

Monitor and control the proper component sequence (Manual or Automatic) during start-up and shut-down of fuel firing equipment.

•

Make continued operation of fuel firing interlocks remaining satisfied.

equipment

subject to certain safety

Page 15 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-95


•

Provide component status to the operator and in some cases, to the unit control system.

•

Provide flame supervision when fuel firing equipment is in service and effect a fuel trip upon certain adverse operating conditions.

•

Initiate a fuel trip when certain abnormal operating conditions exist.

Furnace safeguard supervisory system (FSSS) provided for this project is designed for a natural circulation, Heavy Oil (HO) fired boiler with coal as the primary fuel and Light Oil (LO) as the start-up fuel and Heavy Oil as the fuel for warm up and stabilisation. This system provides for the remote/manual operation of two elevations of high energy arc (HEA) ignitors, two elevations of oil guns with provision for firing Light oil in elevation AB only, Heavy oil in elevation AB & CD and four pulverizers, serving four elevations of 16 coal nozzles from a remote console insert and through operator work stations (OWS) (Refer Figure-1). From the console insert Heavy oil trip valve, Light oil trip valve & HO Recirculation Valve can be opened/closed, Purge cycle can be started, Scanner Fans & Seal Air Fans can be started/stopped & Hot Air Gate can be opened/closed, Pulveriser & Feeder can be started/stopped. Indicating lights on the console insert shows the operating status of various field equipments connected to FSSS. The following operational functions are included in FSSS. •

Furnace purge supervision.

•

Secondary air damper modulation, on/off control and supervision.

•

Light oil on-off control and supervision.

•

Heavy oil on-off control and supervision.

•

Pulveriser and feeder on-off control and supervision.

•

Flame scanner intelligence and checking.

•

Overall boiler flame failure protection.

•

Boiler trip protection.

`

The Furnace Safeguard Supervisory System has been designed for Energise to Open & Energise to Close philosophy. This means any on/off device or equipment has to get an impulse/command to change its present state and has to get again another impulse/command to regain to the original state.

Page 16 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-96


Note :All startup and shutdown operations etc. will be possible from the Hardwired console insert and Operator work station (OWS). 3.0 HEAVY OIL RECIRCULATION VALVE CONTROL (HORV) (Refer Figure- 3) Before any main fuel can be fired the heavy oil must be brought to proper temperature. This is accomplished by recirculating HO through the oil recirculation system by means of the HOTV and HO Recirculation valve (HO Return Trip Valve). FSSS permits the opening of HOTV for oil recirculation purpose following and prior to starting a furnace purge cycle as follows :

a boiler trip

Depressing the "HO Recirculation valve (HORV) open Push Button" will open the Recirculation valve (long), provided all the HO nozzle valves are fully closed. When the HORV is fully open as indicated by the "HORV open" light (red) being on, depress the "HOTV open Push Button". This will start the HO recirculation. Depressing the “HO Recirculation valve CLOSE Push Button” will close the HO Recirculation valve. The HO Recirculation valve will close automatically after any corner heavy oil nozzle valve leaves the closed position. 4.0 FURNACE PURGE Before any fuel firing can take place, (initially or after a boiler trip) a successful furnace purge cycle must be completed. To start a furnace purge cycle proceed as follows: •

Establish AC & DC power to FSSS and the related equipment.

•

Place atleast one ID and one FD fan in service.

•

Establish airflow between 30% and 40% MCR through the furnace.

•

Establish a proper water level in the drum.

After the “PURGE READY” and the “PUSH TO PURGE” lights come on, a furnace purge cycle can be started. When both these lights come on it indicates that all the purge requirements are satisfied (see Note-1 below ). NOTE-1 :-

Page 17 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-97


If both the “ PURGE READY” and the “PUSH TO PURGE” lights do not conditions 1 through 5 above are satisfied, check to see that :

come on after

•

The light oil trip valve is proven closed.

•

All the light oil nozzle valves are proven closed.

•

The heavy oil trip valve is proven closed.

•

All the heavy oil nozzle valves are fully closed.

•

All PA Fans are off.

•

All feeders are off.

•

All hot air gates are fully closed.

•

All the flame scanners show No Flame (Both fire ball and discriminating scanners).

•

No boiler trip command is present (See boiler trip section for specifics).

•

Air flow > 30% and < 40 %

•

All auxiliary dampers are modulating.

The furnace purge cycle can be started after all the purge requirements are satisfied and the “PURGE READY” light is on. The furnace purge cycle is started by depressing the START PURGE Push Button. This will start a five minutes purge timer and the “PURGING” light will come on (see Note-2 below). NOTE-2 :Loss of the purge permissive at any time during the five minutes purging period will reset the purge timer. When this happens, the purge requirements must be reestablished (“PURGE READY”) and another furnace purge cycle shall be started by depressing the “PUSH TO PURGE Push Button”. At the end of the five minutes furnace purge cycle, provided the purge permissive remain satisfied, the boiler trip is reset. This is indicated by the “MFT” light going off, the “PURGING” and “PUSH TO PURGE” lights going off. A “NO MFT” condition is now established and the “CAUSE OF TRIP” memories are reset. The operator may open the various trip valves as described in the following sections. 5.0 SELECTION OF LIGHT OIL/HEAVY OIL FIRING :Either Light Oil or Heavy Oil can be fired at elevation operator.

AB, when selected by the

Page 18 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-98


Depressing the “LIGHT OIL SELECT Push Button” will select light oil, provided all the HO nozzle valves and LO nozzle valves are fully closed .AND. both pairs have been stopped. When the above conditions are satisfied, the “LO SELECTED” light comes on. Depressing the “HO SELECT Push Button” will select heavy oil, provided all the HO Nozzle valves and LO Nozzle valves are fully closed .AND. both pairs have been stopped. When the above conditions are satisfied, the “HO SELECTED” light comes on. 6.0 OIL PROTECTION (TRIPLE REDUNDANT) : For oil protection, triplicate fashion has been implemented. The following signals has been computed in 2 out of 3 Logic. For Heavy Oil : • Heavy oil header temperature very low. • Heavy oil header pressure very low. For light oil : • Light oil header pressure very low. 7.0 LIGHT OIL TRIP VALVE CONTROL (Refer Figure-2) :Depressing the “Light oil trip valve OPEN Push Button” after the furnace purge cycle is completed, (boiler trip reset) will open the light oil trip valve, provided the following conditions are satisfied. • Light oil supply pressure is adequate. • Elevation AB all the light oil nozzle valves remain closed. When the oil trip valve open condition is indicated by a RED light coming on, the “LO elevation trip” command is removed and LO Elevation Start Permit is now established. Pressing the light oil trip valve "Close" Push Button will close the valve. The light oil trip valve also closes automatically under following conditions : Master fuel trip .OR. Any light oil nozzle valve not closed .AND. Light oil header pressure very low (From 2/3 logic). .OR. Atomising air pressure very low. .AND.

Page 19 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-99


No Light oil Start/Stop in El. AB. The LOTV will be commanded to close on Loss of unit +24V DC.

8.0 HEAVY OIL TRIP VALVE CONTROL (Refer Figure- 3) :Depressing the “HO Trip valve OPEN Push Button” will open the Heavy Oil Trip Valve if either of the following conditions are present: HO recirculation valve is fully open .AND. HO Trip valve open command is present .OR. All Heavy oil nozzle valves are closed. .AND. The Heavy oil supply pressure is adequate. .AND. The Heavy oil supply temperature is adequate. .AND. No MFT condition is present. When the Heavy oil trip valve is opened the “HO Trip valve OPEN” light comes on. The “HO elevation trip command” is removed. “HO Elevation start permit” is now established. The HEAVY OIL TRIP VALVE "CLOSE" command can be given by depressing the “HO Trip valve CLOSE Push Button”. This will close the HO Trip valve. This is indicated by “HOTV CLOSED” light coming on. Also the HOTV closes automatically under any one of the following conditions. Master-fuel trip .OR. The following conditions exist for more than 5 seconds : Atomising steam pressure very low .AND. No HO start/stop in any Elevation. .OR. Heavy oil Header pressure very low .AND. Any Heavy oil nozzle valve not closed. .OR. Heavy oil header temperature very low .AND. Any Heavy oil nozzle valve not closed . .AND. Heavy oil trip valve not closed. The HOTV is commanded to close on Loss of unit +24V DC.

Page 20 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-100


9.0 LIGHT OIL ELEVATION START (Elevation AB – PAIR MODE):Light oil can be fired at elevation AB only and in pair basis. Corners 1 and 3 make one pair, while corners 2 and 4 make the other pair. The corners making up a pair are diagonally opposite. To place the light oil guns in service proceed as follows: • •

Select light oil firing. Establish light oil elevation start permit by the following conditions being satisfied. 1. No master fuel trip. 2. Light oil trip valve proven fully open. 3. Pulverizer/Feeder start permit is available.

Pulverizer/Feeder start permit is established under following conditions : Nozzle Tilt Horizontal .AND. Air flow is < 40% MCR .OR. Any Oil Elevation is in service .OR. Any feeder on .AND. No MFT Pressing the associated pair start (1-3 or 2-4) PB, provided the above conditions are satisfied, will initiate a 70 seconds start time to place the associated pair of light oil guns in service. Refer to Heavy oil elevation start for the sequence of introduction of oil gun in service, which is similar. Light oil elevation trip occurs under any of the following conditions : • •

Master fuel trip. Light oil trip valve not open.

10.0 HEAVY OIL ELEVATION START (Elevation-AB, PAIR (Refer Figure-4) :(Typical for HO firing at Elevation-CD) :Pair mode operation is selected when any one of the following conditions exists. • •

MODE)

All coal elevations are not in service Both coal Elevations A & B are not in service . AND. Elevation AB Back up trip exists.

The warm up oil elevation can be placed in service manually, from the oil section console/operator work station (OWS), on pair basis. Either corners 1 and 3 can be placed in service or corners 2 and 4 can be placed in service. Either pair can be placed in service initially to start with.

Page 21 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-101


The “Warm Up Elevation Start Permit” (LO elevation start permit, if LO is selected or HO elevation start permit, if HO is selected) is established if all the following conditions are satisfied. LO trip valve/HO trip valve is fully open (see “Heavy oil trip/Light oil trip valve” section for specifics). Nozzle tilts are horizontal .AND. Air flow is less than 40% MCR OR. Any Coal elevation is in service. After the HO Elevation Start Permit/LO Elevation Start Permit is satisfied, either pair can be placed in service in the following manner. Initially, let us assume that pair 1 and 3 is to be placed in service. Pressing “PAIR 1-3 START Push Button” for the elevation being started, will cause the following events : •

The “PAIR 1-3 START” light is illuminated and the associated “PAIR 1-3 STOP” light goes off.

•

The seventy second elevation start (for corner No.1 and 3) counting period is reset.

The “Elevation Back Up Trip” signal is removed, dampers for “warm up oil firing”.

positioning the associated elevation

When the Push Button is released, the seventy second counting period is started and corner-1 receives a “start” command instantaneously and corner-3 receives a “start” command after 15 seconds. After the “start” command is established for corner-1, the corner oil gun will be placed in service if all the following conditions at corner-1 are satisfied. •

The associated corner scavenge nozzle valve is closed.

•

The associated corner manual atomising (air/steam) isolation valve is open.

•

The local maintenance switch at the associated corner is placed in the “REMOTE” position.

When “start” command is established at corner-1, the command provided all the following conditions are satisfied. •

HEA ignitor

gets advance

LO Nozzle valves and HO Nozzle valves are closed.

Page 22 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-102


•

Discriminating flame scanner shows no flame.

When the spark rod of HEA ignitor is fully advanced, the HEA Rod “ADVANCED” light comes on. Atomising valve gets open command if oil gun is engaged. Once the atomising valve is fully opened, oil nozzle valve gets open command and the exciter of HEA ignitor is energised. The corner oil nozzle valve (LO/HO) receives an following conditions are satisfied.

“open” command provided if all of the

•

The corner is not in scavenge.

•

Atomising nozzle valve (Air/Steam) is proven open.

•

None of the corner trip condition is present .AND. HEA Ignitor spark rod is in “advanced” position.

•

Corner warm-up nozzle valve is not closed .AND. Discriminating scanner shows flame.

When the corner oil nozzle valve (LO/HO) is in “open” condition, then a 15 seconds trial time for the HEA ignitor is initiated. When the corner oil nozzle valve (LO/HO) is proven open, the oil nozzle valve “OPEN” light comes on. At the end of the 15 seconds ignitor trial time, HEA exciter is de-energised and HEA ignitor is retracted. If the associated corner discriminating scanner indicates flame the “DISCRIMINATING SCANNER FLAME” light comes on. Corner-1 oil gun (LO/HO) is now in service. When the 15 seconds counting period expires, corner-3 oil gun start command is established and will be placed in service in the same manner as previously described for corner-1. When the seventy second counting period expires (for corner 1 & 3), the fifteen second timer for corner 3 is reset and oil gun in Corner-1 & 3 will be shut down if the associated oil nozzle valve is not fully open. Corner No. 2 and No. 4 are placed in service by the associated “PAIR 2-4 START Push Button”. The following events will occur : •

The “PAIR 2-4 START” light is illuminated and the associated “PAIR 2-4 STOP” light goes off.

•

The seventy second elevation pair( for corners 2 and 4 ) counting period is reset.

Page 23 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-103


When the Push Button is released, the 70 second counting period is started. The “Start” command for corner 2 is established and a fifteen second counting period, to establish a “Start” command for corner 4 is started. After the “Start” command is established, the associated corner oil guns (LO/HO) are placed in service in the same manner as previously described for corner 1. When atleast three of the four warm-up oil (LO/HO) Nozzle valves are fully open, the warm-up oil elevation (LO/HO) is in service. This is indicated by the “IGNITION PERMIT” light coming on the Coal Elevation console/operator work station (OWS) for the mill associated with the warm-up oil elevation. The “Ignition permit” is now satisfied and the associated mill can be placed in service after other permissives are satisfied. When the seventy second counting period (for corners 2 & 4) expires, the fifteen seconds timer for corner 4 is reset and the oil gun in Corner-2 & 4 will be shut down if the associated oil nozzle valve is not fully open. 11.0 ELEVATION MODE OPERATION (TYPICAL FOR LO & HO FIRING) (Refer Figure-4) :Elevation mode operation is automatically selected when either of the adjacent coal elevations associated with warm-up (LO/HO) oil elevation is in service. When the above condition exists, the “Elevation Mode Operation” is automatically selected and the associated warm-up (LO/HO) oil elevation is placed in service in the following manner (provided the “warm-up elevation start permit” remains satisfied). When pair 1-3 start or pair 2-4 start PUSH BUTTON is pressed, an “Elevation Start” command is established for corner 1 & 3. After the “Elevation Start” command is established, a forty second counting period is started to establish an “Elevation Start” command for corners 2 & 4. Corners 1 & 3 are now placed in service as previously described in the “Pair Mode Operation” section. When the forty second counting period expires, corners 2 & 4 are placed in service as previously described in “Pair Mode Operation” section. When atleast three of the four warm-up (LO/HO) nozzle valves are fully open , the warm-up (LO/HO) elevation is “proven in service”. An “Elevation Unsuccessful Start” condition is established when both seventy second counting period expires and if less than three warm-up (LO/HO) nozzle valves are in service.

Page 24 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-104


When an “Elevation Unsuccessful Start” signal is established, two seconds later, corner 1 and 3 receive “Stop” command and a forty second counting period is started. Forty seconds later corners 2 and 4 receive “Stop” commands. An “Elevation Unsuccessful Start” condition initiates an alarm. All four corners are shut down (see “warm-up oil elevation shutdown” section for specifics).

12.0 PULVERIZER IGNITION PERMIT:Prior to start any feeder, the pulveriser ignition energy must be adequate to coal firing. This is accomplished as follows: PULVERIZER-A A minimum of 3 of the 4 Elevation-AB oil nozzle valves proven open. . OR. Boiler loading is greater than 30% .AND. Feeder-B is in service at greater than 50% loading PULVERIZER-B A minimum of 3 of the 4 Elevation-AB oil nozzle valves proven open. .OR. Boiler loading is greater than 30% .AND. Feeder-A .OR. C is in service at greater than 50% loading. PULVERIZER-C A minimum of 3 of the 4 Elevation-CD heavy oil nozzle valves proven open. .OR. Boiler loading is greater than 30% .AND. Feeder-B .OR. D is in service at greater than 50% loading. .OR. A minimum of 3 of the 4 Elevation-AB heavy oil nozzle valves proven open .AND. Feeder-B is in service at greater than 50% loading. PULVERIZER-D A minimum of 3 of the 4 Elevation-CD heavy oil nozzle valves proven open. .OR. Boiler loading is >30% .AND. Feeder-C is in service at greater than 50% loading. 13.0 PULVERIZER READY (Refer Figure-8):Prior to starting a pulverizer, a pulverizer start permit condition for the respective pulverizer must be established by confirming the following conditions being satisfied :

Page 25 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-105


Each condition is indicated by a yellow light on console/operator work station (OWS). •

Pulverizer/Feeder start permit.

•

Pulverizer discharge valve open.

•

Pulverizer outlet temperature not high.

•

Cold air gate open.

•

Tramp iron hopper valve open.

•

Primary air permit .OR. pulverizer on.

•

Auto pulverizer No unsuccessful start.

•

All Burner isolation gate open.

•

Pulveriser no trip.

•

Lube oil system healthy.

When all the above conditions are satisfied for the respective pulverizer, its associated pulverizer ready condition is satisfied. 14.0 PULVERIZER START:Pulverizer and the associated equipments can be started either automatically or manually. Auto/Manual mode of pulverizer start can be selected by means of selector pushbuttons provided on coal Elevation console/operator work station (OWS). 14.1 PULVERIZER START (MANUAL MODE):By establishing Ignition energy available and pulverizer ready conditions for the respective pulverizer, it may be placed in service as follows: •

Ensure pulverizer ready condition and ignition energy available condition are present. Start pulverizer by pressing its associated "START” Push Button. First, seal air valve opens, after seal air to bowl DP adequate is established, pulverizer will start.

•

When the pulverizer is proven on as indicated by the (Red) pulverizer "ON" light, open the hot air gate by pressing its "OPEN" button and allow the pulverizer to come up to the temperature.

Page 26 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-106


•

When the pulverizer comes up to temperature, (approximately more than 49 deg. Csay around 70 deg. C) start the feeder by pressing its associated "START” Push Button. Coal flow must be proven either by the coal flow detector or satisfactory pulverizer current within 5 seconds, after the feeder is started.

•

Fifteen seconds after the feeder is started, the feeder output is released to the include feeder in the totalising circuit.

•

When the feeder is ON for 50 secs. the feeder speed is released to auto control and the fuel air dampers are opened to modulate as a function of feeder speed.

•

When a minimum of two feeders are established at greater than 50% loading, the associated oil elevations may be shut down provided the feeder has been ON for a minimum of 3 minutes.

OPERATOR’S NOTE :A single feeder in service for fifty seconds at its minimum speed setting will establish a fireball in the furnace (a single fireball is established when a coal elevation is placed in service. When additional coal elevations are placed in service, this single fireball is merely enlarged). If the ignition energy is removed, the fireball will be monitored by the associated elevation flame scanners. However, good operator procedure dictates that an adjacent feeder must be placed in service and both feeder speeds be increased to 50% before removing the of the fireball. When removing feeders from service, the inverse procedure should be followed and ignition energy should be reinstated when only two feeders remain in service at 50% feeder speed. 14.2 PULVERIZER START (AUTO MODE) :The selected pulverizer can be placed in operation automatically if all the following conditions are satisfied: •

The associated " Pulverizer Ready “ condition remains satisfied.

•

The " AUTO " mode is selected for the associated pulverizer.

The pulverizer is started by momentarily pressing the pulverizer "start" Push Button. The following events will occur : a) A 180 second counting period is started to prove the associated pulverizer / feeder in service. b) If the pulverizer ignition energy permissive is not satisfied an "Start Oil Elevation Auto” command is established and the associated HFO elevation is automatically placed in operation. (Refer to " Elevation Mode of Operation" section for details).

Page 27 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-107


c) When the associated ignition elevation start time has expired (both seventy second "Pair start" counting periods have expired) and the pulverizer ignition permissive is satisfied, the "Auto start pulverizer" and "Open hot air gate" commands are established simultaneously. d) A pulverizer "Start" command is established and the pulverizer is started in the same manner as previously described in pulverizer manual mode. e) When the pulverizer is proven ON the following events occur: •

The hot air gate is opened, provided the pulverizer outlet temperature is less than High Value (94 Degree C).

•

A sixty second counting period is started to establish an "Auto start feeder" Command.

f) When the sixty second counting period expires, an "auto start feeder" command is established for five seconds. A "start feeder " command is now established, provided the hot air gate is open. The feeder is put into service in the same manner as previously described. After the 180 second "elevation start" counting period expires and the pulverizer is on and the feeder is off, the unsuccessful elevation start is established. When the feeder is off for more than three minutes, the pulverizer receives an "auto stop pulverizer" command and is shutdown. 15.0 PULVERIZER IN SERVICE (Refer Figure-8 ):With the pulverizer/feeder in service, several operational parameters are continuously monitored. However, it is left to the operator’s discretion to investigate and take further corrective action. An operating pulverizer and feeder are subject to the following operational checks : •

The feeder speed will be run back to minimum if the pulverizer bowl differential pressure is high .OR. if the respective Pulveriser Motor current is High.

•

If the pulverizer outlet temperature is high (greater than 94 Degree C), then the following events occur: i) Pulverizer air and temperature control is released from auto mode. The hot air dampers close and the cold air dampers open to 100% pulverizer air flow position. ii) The hot air gate is closed after a thirty second time delay to allow the associated dampers to react.

Page 28 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-108


Any of the following conditions will give signal to run the feeder speed to minimum until the initiating condition is corrected. •

Pulverizer bowl differential pressure high.

•

Feeder is off.

Loss of coal flow and low pulverizer current will trip the feeder and close hot air damper. The operator should take appropriate corrective action, then reopen the hot air damper and restart the feeder. High pulverizer outlet temperature (above 94 deg. C) will open cold air damper and close the hot air damper. It will close Hot Air Gate after 30 sec delay. 16.0 MILL PROTECTION (TRIPLE REDUNDANT) : Mill protection system is governed by the mill trip logic. Triplicate fashion has been implemented for the following signal for all mill elevations as a part of unit protection logic. • PA pressure very low. 17.0 PULVERIZER TRIP (Refer Figure-5, 7 & 8) :The following conditions will initiate a pulverizer trip command. •

Pulverizer discharge valve not open.

•

Loss of unit +24V DC power.

•

Pulverizer ignition permit is not available .AND. ignition required.

•

MFT (See boiler trip section for details).

•

Loss of primary air

•

Seal air header to Pulverizer differential pressure low .AND. Pulvurizer on than 60 seconds.

•

Lube oil system failed.

•

Any burner isolation gate not open.

•

Pulveriser failed to start for more than 10 seconds.

for more

Page 29 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-109


•

Hot Air Gate Closed & Cold Air Gate Not Open

When the primary air duct pressure falls below the low set point (for more than 5 secs.) all pulverizers in service a receive stop command. When both PA fans stop or the primary air duct pressure goes very low, all the pulverizers are tripped instantaneously. When one PA fan or one FD fan trips and three or more pulverizers are in service, each pulverizer with a 2 sec time delay a trip command will be given starting from the pulverizer serving top most coal elevation, until the number of pulverizers remaining in service is reduced to two. 18.0 PULVERIZER SHUT DOWN :18.1 PULVERIZER SHUT DOWN (MANUAL MODE) :When manual pulverizer control mode is selected, manual shut down of a pulverizer is accomplished as follows: •

Start the associated oil elevation, if it is not in service.

•

Reduce the feeder speed to minimum.

•

Close the hot air gate by pressing its "CLOSE" Push Button.

•

When the pulverizer outlet temperature is reduced to (below 49 deg C or 120 deg F), then shut down the feeder by pressing its "OFF" Push Button.

•

Allow the pulverizer to run for about 2 minutes to ensure that it is completely empty of coal, then shut down the pulverizer by pressing its "OFF" Push Button.

18.2 PULVERIZER SHUTDOWN (AUTO MODE) :When the Pulverizer is in the auto mode of operation, the pulverizer is shutdown as described below. a)

The operator initiates a pulverizer auto shutdown sequence by momentarily depressing the associated "Stop” pushbutton. The following events will occur. i) The "auto stop memory" signal is established and the "Auto start memory" is reset. ii) If the associated pulverizer ignition permissive is not satisfied, an "Auto start ignition energy" command is established.

Page 30 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-110


iii) A ten minutes "Elevation stop" counting period is started. b)

When the ignition time has expired (both seventy second HO pair starting Periods have expired) and the pulverizer ignition permissive is satisfied, then the following commands are established simultaneously. i) Run the feeder speed to minimum. The feeder speed will be reduced through auto control. ii) Close hot air gate in auto mode. The associated hot air gate is closed in the manner previously described (see Pulverizer Manual Shut down section).

c)

When the hot air gate is closed and the pulverizer outlet temperature has been reduced below 49 degree C (120 degree F), the associated feeder will receive an "Auto stop" Pulverizer command. The feeder will now be shut down.

d)

When the feeder is off for three minutes, the associated pulveriser will receive an "Auto stop" pulveriser command. The pulveriser will now be shut down.

The associated H.O elevation can be shut down when the furnace and boiler conditions have stabilised. When the ten minutes "Elevation stop” count period expires, an "Unsuccessful Elevation shut down” signal will be sent to the alarm if any of the following conditions exist at the associated coal elevation: i) The Pulveriser is on. ii) The Feeder is on. iii)The Hot air gate is not closed. HOT AIR GATE CONTROL :Pressing Hot Air Gate “OPEN” are present.

Push Button on, will open the gate if following conditions

Pulveriser on .AND. Pulveriser auto start .OR. Pulveriser manual mode .AND. Close Hot air gate command is not available. “Red” lamp will indicate open state of the gate. Hot Air Gate will close automatically if following conditions are present.

Page 31 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-111


Close Hot Air Gate command present for more than 30 seconds. .OR. MFT .OR. pulveriser off Loss of unit +24V DC will also close the Hot Air Gate. This is indicated by “Green” lamp. 19.0 OIL ELEVATION SHUTDOWN (Pair mode Elevation-AB, LO & HO) :(Typical for HO firing at Elevation-CD) When adjacent coal elevations are not in service and elevation back up trip exists or when all coal elevations are off, the associated warm-up (LO/HO) elevations are automatically selected to the “Pair operation Mode” and the warm-up (LO/HO) elevation can be shut down, pair-wise. Under “pair operation mode” the oil elevation is removed from service in the following manner. Either pair (1-3) or (2-4) can be initially shutdown. Each pair of oil guns are shutdown in the following manners. Pressing “PAIR (1-3 or 2-4) STOP” Push Button momentarily will establish a stop signal for that pair. This will cause the following events to occur : A 375 second elevation “Pair Stop” counting period is started. The associated Elevation “PAIR (1-3 or 2-4) STOP” light comes on. A “Stop” command for corner 1 (or corner 2) is established, and a fifteen seconds counting period is started to establish a “Stop” command for corner 3 (or corner 4). The corner oil (LO/HO) nozzle valve will receive a “CLOSE” command. (When the corner oil nozzle valve is moved to the fully closed position, the oil valve “CLOSED” light comes ON and the associated “DISCRIMINATING SCANNERS NO FLAME” light comes on.) After the warm-up (LO/HO) nozzle valve is closed, the scavenge nozzle valve receives “Open” command. Also the spark rod of HEA is advanced and gives spark for a period of 15 seconds. After the scavenge valve is fully open, a five minute counting period is started.

Page 32 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-112


After the five minutes scavenge trial time expires, the Scavenge valve receives “Close” command. When the Scavenge valve is moved from the fully open position, the five minute counting period is reset. When the Scavenge valve is closed, the associated atomising (Air/Steam) nozzle valve receives a “Close” command. When the fifteen second counting period expires, a “Stop” command is established for corner 3 (or corner 4) which is removed from service in the same manner as previously described for corner 1 (or corner 2). After the pair stop time expires, the scavenge valve memory is reset. The other pair (1-3 or 2-4) is stopped similarly by depressing the “PAIR STOP” Push Button. (see Note-4 below). NOTE -4 :Simultaneously, a 360 second counting period is started to establish a “warm-up” elevation back up trip after the first pair (1-3 or 2-4) of oil guns have been shut down and the “Stop” command for the first oil gun of the second pair (1-3 or 2-4) is established. The associated pair of oil guns are shut down in the described for the other pair of oil guns (1-3 or 2-4).

same manner

as

previously

When the 360 second counting period expires, a warm-up “Elevation Back up trip” condition is established. This pair “Back up trip” establishes a redundant “Stop” command to ensure that the oil guns are shut down. The signal to “Position the warm-up oil elevation dampers for warm-up fuel firing” is removed. After the “warm-up oil elevation back up trip” is established, an “Unsuccessful warm-up oil elevation shut down” condition is established when both 375 second counting period expire and any warm-up (LO/HO) nozzle valve is not closed or any HEA Ignitor is not retracted in the associated elevation. This initiates “Oil Elevation Unsuccessful Shut down” alarm. A warm-up oil (LO/HO) gun may also be shut down and scavenged individually by placing its local gun maintenance switch in the “SCAVENGE” position. The warm-up oil gun will be shut down and scavenged as described above. To return the warm-up oil gun to service, return the local gun maintenance switch to “REMOTE” position and depress the associated warm-up oil elevation “PAIR START” Push Button.

Page 33 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-113


Any one of the conditions listed below will trip an individual warm-up oil corner by issuing a corner trip signal. •

Associated local maintenance control switch turned to “OFF” position.

•

Warm-up oil gun not engaged.

•

Atomising (Air/Steam) Manual isolating valve not open.

Corner not in scavenge .AND. Corner start time expired .AND. Warm-up oil nozzle valve not open .OR. Atomising steam nozzle valve not open .OR. Discriminating scanner no flame Elevation back up trip. LO (HO) selected when HO ( LO) is fired. 20.0 OIL ELEVATION SHUTDOWN (Elevation mode, Elevation-AB, LO & HO): (Typical for HO firing at Elevation CD) When either of the coal elevation associated with the warm-up oil elevation, is in service, the warm up oil elevation can be shut down under this elevation mode. The subject elevation can be shut down as described in the following section. Under Elevation mode, the oil elevation is removed from service in the following manner. Pressing the “PAIR STOP” Push Button. (1-3 or 2-4) will command.

establish a corner “STOP”

The “PAIR STOP” command will establish a corner “STOP” command provided both coal elevations associated with the warm-up elevation have been ON for at least three minutes or both associated coal elevations are not in service. The corner “STOP” command will cause the following events to occur : •

A 375 second elevation pair counting period is started for corner 1 and 3.

•

A forty second counting period is started to establish a “STOP” command for corner 2 and 4.

Page 34 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-114


The Elevation “PAIR 1-3 STOP” light comes on. A “STOP” command for corner 1 is established and a fifteen second counting period is started to establish a “STOP” command for corner 3. After the “STOP” command is established, the oil gun at corner 1 is removed from service in the same manner as previously described. When the fifteen second counting period expires, the “STOP” command for corner 3 is established and is removed from service in the same manner as corner 1. When the forty second counting period expires, the “STOP” command is established causing the following events to occur. A 375 second elevation pair counting period is started for corners 2 and 4. The Elevation “PAIR 2-4 STOP” light comes on. Corner 2 stop command is established and a fifteen second counting period is started to establish a stop command for corner 4. The oil gun at corner 2 is removed from service described.

in

the same manner as previously

When fifteen second counting period expires the “STOP” command for corner 4 is established and is removed from service in the same manner as corner 2. All other interlocks i.e., Backup trip, elevation unsuccessful shutdown etc. are same as described earlier. 21.0 UNIT PROTECTION :For unit protection, triple redundant fashion has been implemented for the following signals (three s each ). All the three s are distributed to the redundant protection system. • Furnace pressure very high. • Furnace pressure very low. • Drum level very high. • Drum level very low. • Air Flow < 30 %. • Loss of Reheater Protection. • Spare trip. All the above conditions are processed in 2 independent sub systems and 2 out of 3 voting are done in individual processor.

Page 35 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-115


In addition to the above , the internally generated trip signals like • Loss of all fuel trip. • Flame failure trip. • Less than Fire ball and loss of AC. are processed in the above two processors for 1 out of 2 voting for formalising the MFT condition. 22.0 BOILER TRIP CONDITIONS :22.1 MASTER FUEL TRIP (MFT) Master Fuel Trip is initiated by any one of the following conditions : • • • • • • • • • • • • • •

Less than fire ball and loss of AC at any elevation in service (See the NOTE-5). Drum water level very low for more than 5 seconds. Drum water level very high for more than 10 seconds. Both FD Fans off. Both ID Fans off. Air flow is less than 30% Furnace pressure very low. Furnace pressure very high. Loss of all fuel trip (See the NOTE-6) Unit flame failure trip (See the NOTE-7) Both emergency trip Push Buttons pressed (Operator initiated boiler trip) Spare trip. Loss of Reheater protection. Loss of 220V DC for more than 2 second.

NOTE-5 :“Less than fire ball and loss of AC in any elevation in service” condition occurs, when all the mills are not in service and there is a loss of power supply (24 V DC-for Solenoids) at any of the elevation in service. Under this condition as ignition energy will not be proper (no fire ball), the HO elevation (Oil) cannot be allowed to run without control (as there is no power supply). Hence the boiler has to be tripped to shut down the elevation. NOTE–6 :“Loss of All Fuel Trip” circuit is armed as soon as oil firing is introduced into the furnace, through any one of the following conditions. i.e. if any oil burner comes into service. This condition also indicates that the “Boiler is on”.

Page 36 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-116


This condition is generated when any one of the following condition occurs : Elevation AB any LO nozzle valves not closed Elevation AB any HO nozzle valves not closed Elevation CD any HO nozzle valves not closed

22.2 LOSS OF ALL FUEL TRIP : “Loss of All Fuel Trip” condition is generated if all the following conditions exist along with “Loss of all fuel trip arming” condition. All feeders are off .AND. Elevation AB Backup trip .OR. All LO valves are closed .OR. LO trip valve is not open .AND. Elevation AB back up trip .OR. All HO valves are closed .AND. Elevation CD back up trip .OR. All HO valves are closed .OR. HO Trip Valve not open. Loss of all fuel trip arming memory is reset 5 seconds after MFR trip occurs. 22.3 UNIT FLAME FAILURE :“Unit Flame Failure Trip” occurs if all the six elevations vote for No flame along with the arming signal. Conditions for the generation of No Flame voting Elevation wise is given below : ELEVATION-A Feeder-A is not proven. .OR. Elevation-AB 3 out of 4 Fireball scanners show no flame .AND. HO/LO 2 out of 4 nozzle valves not open . .OR. Elevation-AB started and loss of power. ELEVATION-B Feeder-B is not proven .OR. Elevation-AB 3 out of 4 Fireball scanners show no flame .AND. HO/LO 2 out of 4 nozzle valves not open . .OR.

Page 37 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-117


Elevation-AB started and loss of power. .AND. Elevation-BC 3 out of 4 fire ball scanners show no Flame ELEVATION-C Feeder-C not proven . .OR. Elevation-CD 3 out of 4 Fireball scanners show no flame .AND. HO 2 out of 4 nozzle valves not open . .OR. Elevation-CD started and loss of power. .AND. Elevation-BC 3 out of 4 fire ball scanners show no flame ELEVATION-D Feeder-D not proven. .OR. Elevation-CD 3 out of 4 Fireball scanners show no flame .AND. HO 2 out of 4 nozzle valves not open . .OR. Elevation-CD started and loss of power. .AND. Elevation-DD 3 out of 4 fire ball scanners show no flame NOTE-7 :“Unit Flame failure Trip” circuit is armed 2 seconds after any coal elevation is put into service. 22.4 FIRST OUT TRIP SYSTEM :A First Out Trip System provided allows the operator to determine the cause of a boiler trip by observing the indication lamps located on the Unit console/operator work station (OWS) under First Cause of Trip. When an event that causes occurrence of boiler trip, the associated “Cause Of Trip” memory is set, and the indicating lamp for trip command, responsible for the boiler trip is illuminated and the successive trip commands to the other indications are blocked. When the event that caused the boiler trip is corrected & boiler purging is completed the “Cause Of Trip” memory is reset. This indicates that a “No Boiler Trip Command” is established. The memories are reset automatically after a successful 5 minute furnace purge cycle has been completed. The FIRST CAUSE OF TRIP light that caused the boiler trip will go off.

Page 38 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-118


22.5 POST PURGE EXCURSION PROTECTION :Post purge excursion protection circuit has been designed in the Furnace Safeguard Supervisory System. It operates as described below: When all the following conditions are satisfied, a 5-minute counting period is started. • • • • • • • • • •

Light oil trip valve closed. Elevation AB all LO nozzle valves closed. Heavy oil trip valve closed. All elevation all HO nozzle valves closed. All Feeders off. Air flow > 30 % MCR and <40 % MCR. All scanners show “no flame”. All Hot air gates closed. All aux. air dampers modulating All PA fans off.

After 5 minute counting period expires, the “Post Purge Fan Trip” memory is set, if very high or very low furnace pressure exists, the post purge fan trip command is issued (for tripping FD&ID fans). When any HO / LO valve is open, this is reset. 22.6 FEED FORWARD COMMAND TO FURNACE DRAFT CONTROL :A 30 seconds Feed Forward command to Furnace draft control is given if either of the conditions listed below exists. • •

Loss of unit +24V DC power Occurrence of Master Fuel Trip, when the boiler is on arming is present).

(i.e., Loss of all fuel

trip

22.7 FURNACE PRESSURE RECORDER SPEED CHANGE :This has been provided to switch the Furnace Pressure Recorder to the alternate speed (if Dual speed recorder is provided) under the conditions mentioned below, to observe Furnace Draft fluctuations. • MFT • Loss of unit +24V DC power • Furnace Pressure High or Low For condition 1 & 2 mentioned above, the Recorder speed is reverted back to original value after 30 seconds. For condition 3, the Recorder is set to original value 30 seconds after condition 3 is removed.

Page 39 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-119


23.0 SCANNER AIR FAN CONTROL (Refer Figure 6):Scanner fan “A” or “B” can be started manually by depressing the respective “START PB”. Scanner fan “A” or “B” will start automatically whenever the scanner duct to furnace differential pressure goes below 150 mm W.C. .AND. No MFT .OR. When there is loss of unit +24 V DC. If one scanner fan fails to start within 5 secs. after receiving the start command, the other scanner fan will start automatically. Scanner fans A or B can be stopped by depressing the respective “STOP PB” provided there is No start command .AND. Scanner duct to furnace differential pressure is more than 150mm W.C. When both the FD fans are off .OR. Loss of unit +24 V DC, scanner emergency will open automatically. Damper closes automatically when any FD fan is ON.

damper

24.0 SEAL AIR FAN CONTROL (Refer Figure-7):There are two seal air fans that serve this unit, one working and one standby. Any seal air fan can be started manually by depressing its “START PB”. This action gives start command to the motor. The seal air fan which is not in service, is started on Auto command if, Any PA fan is on .AND. Seal air header to cold PA header DP is low for > 10 secs. The seal air fan “A” will start automatically 5 second after the seal air fan “B” trips or fails to start on receiving start command (SA fan “B” starts automatically if SA fan “A” fails to start). Any seal air fan can be stopped by depressing its “STOP PB”, provided the following conditions are satisfied. Seal Air Header / Cold Air duct DP not low .AND. Both Seal Air fans on Both Seal Air Fans are tripped once Both PA Fans are off > 15 Secs. 25.0 SECONDARY AIR DAMPER CONTROL:For a complete description of the Secondary Air Damper Control, refer the write up on SADC system. Operation of the secondary air damper control as effected by the FSSS is described here.

Page 40 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-120


25.1 AUXILIARY AIR DAMPER CONTROL All elevations of the aux. air dampers will be automatically switched to “Manual” control and then commanded to open 100%, if any one of the following conditions exist. • • • •

All FD fans are off All ID fans are off Master fuel trip exists (for more than 2 seconds PULSE) Loss of Unit +24 V DC power

When the auxiliary air control is placed in the “Auto” mode of operation, the auxiliary air dampers modulate to control wind box to furnace differential pressure at a predetermined set point. During the furnace purge cycle, all auxiliary air dampers modulate to maintain wind box to furnace differential pressure at a predetermined set point. When the unit load exceeds 30% of MCR, the following events occurs : The wind box to furnace differential set point is gradually increased as the unit load is increased. Conversely, the differential pressure set point is gradually decreased as unit load is decreased. The rate of increase (or decrease) is controlled by the auxiliary damper controller. When the Unit Load is increased above 30% MCR, the Auxiliary air dampers on elevation AB, BC, CD & DD are closed in a timed sequence (10 seconds interval) provided the associated coal elevations are not in service and the associated oil elevations are not in service. The auxiliary air dampers are closed, starting from the top elevation, progressing towards the lowest elevation. When the unit load is reduced below 30% of MCR, the following events occur: •

The wind-box to furnace differential pressure set point reverts to its original value.

•

The auxiliary air dampers associated with the coal and LO/HO elevations not in service are opened in a timed sequence (10 second interval) starting at the lowest elevation, progressing towards the top.

When a LO/HO Elevation is started (i.e. when the associated “elevation back-up” trip is removed) the associated auxiliary air dampers in that elevation are set to preset position for LO/HO firing.

Page 41 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-121


When the “Post Trip Purge Time Expired” command is established and all FD / ID fans are not off and a Master fuel trip” command doesn’t exist, then a 35 seconds counting period is started. After it expires, the “Open All Auxiliary Air Dampers” command is removed from memory. 25.2 FUEL (COAL) AIR DAMPERS CONTROL :All elevations of fuel air dampers are commanded to open 100% when any one of the following conditions exist. All FD fans are off All ID fans are off Master fuel trip exists (for more than 2 seconds PULSE) Loss of Unit +24V DC power When a coal elevation is in service, the associated fuel air dampers modulate as a function of feeder speed as indicated by the associated coal elevation “MODULATING” light coming on. When the coal elevation is shut down, the associated fuel air dampers are closed, as indicated by a “CLOSED” light . When the “Post Trip Purge Time Expired” command is established and all FD and ID fans are not off and a “Master fuel trip” command does not exist, the “Open upper fuel air dampers (elevation C & D)” command is removed from memory. Thirty seconds later, the “Open lower fuel air dampers (elevation B & A )” command is removed from memory. -------ooOOOoo-------

Page 42 of 42

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-122

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-123

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-124

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-125

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-126

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-127

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-128

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-129

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-130

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-131

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-132

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-133

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-134

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-135

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-136

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-137

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-138

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-139

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-140

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-141

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-142

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-143

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-144

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-145

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-146

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-147

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-148

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-149

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-150

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-151

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-152

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-153

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-154

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-155

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-156

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-157

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-158

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-159

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-160

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-161

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-162

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-163

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-164

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-165

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-166

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-167

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-168

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-169

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-170

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-171

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-172

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-173

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-174

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-175

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-176

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-177

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-178

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-179

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-180

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-181

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-182

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-183

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-184

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-185

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-186

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-187

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-188

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-189

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-190

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-191

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-192

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-193

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-194

GO TO INDEX

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-195

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-2-196

TAB - 3

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-197

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-198

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-199

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-200

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-201

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-202

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-203

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-204

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-205

GO TO INDEX

SADC WRITE-UP, BHATINDA R & M , 2 x120 MW

BHARAT HEAVY ELECTRICALS LIMITED, TIRUCHIRAPALLI-620 014 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION/FB

PUNJAB ELECTRICITY BOARD, GURUNANAK THERMAL POWER STATION (BHATINDA - R & M), Unit - 3 & 4, 2 x 120 MW CUST. Nos. 4006 & 4007

WRITE-UP ON

SECONDARY AIR DAMPER CONTROL SYSTEM REVISION HISTORY Rev. No.

Date

00

13-06-2007

Description

Prepared

Checked

Approved

S. Chandraleka

V.M. Selvaraaj

S. Ramachandran

Initial Release

C:\DOCUMENTS AND SETTINGS\4172485\DESKTOP\BHATINDA SADC WRITE UP.DOC

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-206

BHATINDA – R & M – 3 & 4 SADC WRITE UP

IMPORTANT NOTE

This write up is meant for general guidelines and better understanding of the system. However, it may be noted that “All the logic conditions” spelt in English Language may not be exact equivalent of pictorial representation of logics. It is mandatory that the operating personal should refer to the respective contract logics. The various set point values, damper position values and the characteristics shown in the relevant figures and control schemes are only indicative values for start-up/initial operations. However, the same have to be adjusted for proper operations as detailed in the control philosophy (under 4.0) It must be recognized that no amount of written instruction can replace intelligent thinking and reasoning on the part of boiler operators, especially when coping with unforeseen operating conditions. It is operators’ responsibility to become thoroughly familiar, not only with immediate steam generating equipment but also with all pertinent control equipment. Satisfactory performance and safety depend to a great extent on proper functioning of controls and auxiliary equipment.

2 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-207


CONTENTS 1.0

FIGURES (FIGURE-1 TO 4)

2.0

INTRODUCTION

3.0

DESCRIPTION & TERMINOLOGY

4.0

CONTROL PHILOSOPHY

5.0

OPERATION

3 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-208


Figure-1

HEA IGNITOR BHEL SCAN AIR DAMPER COAL + PRIMARY AIR HFO OIL GUN HFO+LFO OIL GUN MANUAL DAMPER AUX. AIR DAMPER FUEL AIR DAMPER OVER FIRE AIR DAMPER

4 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-209

FURNACE TO WB DP (mm)


100

FIGURE-2

60

Note :1. The Arrow indicates that the values are adjustable at Site.

40

2. The DP values indicated are values during initial commissioning/ operation. Final DP values are to be decided at Site. 0

FUEL DAMPER OPENING (%)

0

30 45 60 BOILER LOAD (%)

100

FIGURE-3 20

Note :1. The Arrow indicates that the values are adjustable at Site. 2. The Fuel Air Damper opening (%) as indicated are to Start with during

5

commissioning/operation. Final value of Fuel Air Damper % opening are to be decided at Site

0 0

25

60

100

FIGURE-4

FA

FA

-

-

Lo we r

U pp er

100

O

O

OFA DAMPER OPENING (%)

FEED RATE (%)

0 50

75

100

BOILER LOAD (%)

5 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-210


2.0.

INTRODUCTION

In tangential firing concept, the furnace itself constitutes the burner. Fuel and air are introduced into the furnace through four wind box assemblies. Fuel and air nozzles in the corners are pointed in a line, tangent to an imaginary circle, at the centre of the furnace. The result of this arrangement is a rotating swirling action that is very effective in mixing the burning fuel with secondary air. The total combustion air flow supplied in the boiler consists of two parts, one, the primary air, which is used for drying and transporting the coal from the pulveriser through the coal piping into the furnace and is supplied by the primary air fans and two, the secondary air sent through the four corners of the wind box and is supplied by the FD fans. The total secondary air flow is controlled by forced draft fan, in proportion to the fuel being fired. Total air secondary flow is measured by a flow metering device called aero-foil meter. The measured air flow is compared against the fuel flow, with the resultant signal positioning the FD fan inlet guide. This inlet guide is positioned to maintain the required air flow regardless and independent of secondary air damper position. The secondary air dampers located in wind box apportions the total air between various elevations. How this air is proportioned depends on which fuel is being burnt, the number of elevations in service and the firing rate at each elevation. The function of Secondary Air Damper Control (SADC) System is to proportion the total air around the firing elevation as per the criteria spelt above. In fact the SADC system is a combination of both analog and digital system, as the amount of fuel fired and the number of firing elevations decide the damper position. Prior to stepping into control philosophy and damper operation it is essential to distinguish the different terminology associated with secondary air. 3.0.

DESCRIPTION AND TERMINOLOGY (Refer Figure-1)

In total, each wind box assembly is divided into 9 compartments. Each compartment is designated either by single or double alphabet constituting 9 elevations. An elevation designates all the four corner compartments. There are 4 elevations which houses Coal nozzles for firing the main fuel. These are designated with single English letter “A” through “D”. There is one elevation (designated as AB) which houses oil burner assembly for firing start up/stabilizing fuel viz., Light Fuel Oil (LO) and Heavy Fuel Oil (HO). The elevations designated as AB & CD are housed with oil burner assembly for firing Heavy Fuel Oil (HO). Each oil compartment is interposed between two Coal nozzle assemblies. There are two numbers of over fire air compartment at the top of the windbox. They are designated as OFA (Lower) and OFA (Upper) respectively. The amount of oil firing is designated as % of MCR (maximum continuous rating).

6 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-211


The other elevations viz., AA, BC & DD house only air nozzles to direct air stream into furnace aiding combustion of fuel. At the inlet of each compartment there are control dampers. Each damper is operated by a damper drive unit. All damper drives in any one elevation receive the same signal from the secondary air control system. If secondary air itted to a fuel compartment in service, it is referred as fuel air. Secondary air itted to the furnace through air compartments and fuel compartments not in service, is termed as auxiliary air. The auxiliary air damper control is separate from the fuel air damper control. 4.0. CONTROL PHILOSOPHY The auxiliary air damper control system positions the auxiliary air dampers to maintain a wind box to furnace differential pressure (Refer Figure-2). The auxiliary air dampers are positioned to maintain the required wind box to furnace differential pressure according to the boiler load. The wind box to furnace differential pressure indicated in Figure-2 is the suggested value to start with during commissioning. In the initial periods of operation, the flame condition with reference to ignition stability, ignition point relative to fuel nozzles, overall combustion conditions in the furnace are to be studied for various wind box to furnace differential pressures and the values are to be optimised at site (the arrow marks indicated in Figure-2 represents that the values are adjustable). Based on this, the final curve showing the relationship between the wind box to furnace differential pressure versus the boiler load is to be decided for the type of coal used. The fuel air damper control system positions the fuel air damper in proportion to the fuel firing rate (Refer Figure-3). The fuel air damper position as indicated in Figure-3 is the suggested value to start with during commissioning. In the initial periods of operation, the flame condition with reference to ignition stability, ignition point relative to fuel nozzles, overall combustion conditions in the furnace are to be studied for various fuel air damper positions and the values are to be optimised at site (the arrow marks indicated in Figure-3 represents that the values are adjustable). Based on this the final curve showing the relationship between the fuel air damper positions versus the fuel feed rate is to be decided for the type of coal used. The final setting must not produce hazardous condition either from Ignition stability or from Ignition point being too close to fuel nozzles in all possible loads, number of pulverisers in service, etc.

7 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-212


On coal fired boilers the characteristics of fuel like, Fixed Carbon, Volatile Matter and Ash composition will determine the optimum wind box to furnace differential pressures and the fuel air damper positions. Accordingly the optimised settings are to be decided as above for the coal used. Later, if the coal quality changes or the coal source itself is changed, it shall be necessary to once again carryout optimisation studies for the new coal and revised settings are to be finalized. This unit is equipped with oil elevation for warm up and stabilisation (designed for 7.5 – 30 % MCR). In this case the oil elevation dampers are positioned to a fixed % opening during oil firing. When oil is not fired, these dampers are controlled to maintain the wind box to furnace differential pressure in line with other auxiliary dampers. 5.0. OPERATION AUXILLARY AIR DAMPERS : All elevations of the auxiliary air dampers will be automatically switched to “Manual” control and then commanded to open 100%, if any one of the following conditions exist. x x x x

Both FD fans are Off Both ID fans are Off Master fuel trip exists Loss of Unit +24 V DC supply in FSSS

Also the auxiliary air control loop is tripped to manual if any of the following conditions exist. x x x

DP transmitter Deviation High Failure of selected DP transmitter Furnace to Windbox DP Very High (> 240mm WC)

Priority interlocks for selection of auxiliary air control loop to auto is that none of the “Trip to manual” conditions should be present. When the auxiliary air control is placed in the “Auto” mode of operation, the auxiliary air dampers modulate to control wind box to furnace differential pressure at a predetermined set point. During the furnace purge period and initial operation of the unit up to 30% MCR load all elevations of auxiliary air dampers (AB, BC, CD & DD) modulate to maintain a predetermined set point (approximately 40 mm of water column) differential pressure between furnace & wind box. As the unit loading increases above 30% MCR, the set point ramps up automatically and at a predetermined break point the slope of the ramp changes. The wind box to furnace differential set point is gradually increased as the unit load is increased. Conversely, the differential

8 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-213


pressure set point is gradually decreased as unit load is decreased. The rate of increase (or decrease) is controlled by the auxiliary damper controller. Above 30% MCR boiler load, the auxiliary air elevation associated with the main fuel elevation in service, modulate to maintain the varying DP. Those not associated with any elevation in service are closed from top to bottom. The closing signal comes from FSSS. When the Unit Load is increased above 30% MCR, the Auxiliary air dampers on elevations AB, BC, CD & DD are closed in a timed sequence (10 second interval) provided the associated Coal elevations are not in service and the associated oil elevations are not in service. The auxiliary air dampers are closed, starting from the top elevation, progressing towards the lowest elevation. When the unit load is reduced below 30% MCR, the following events occur : x

The wind-box to furnace differential pressure set point reverts to its original value

x

The auxiliary air dampers associated with the Coal and Oil elevations not in service are opened in a timed sequence (10 second interval) starting at the lowest elevation, progressing towards the top

When the “Post Trip Purge Time Expired” command is established and “Both FD and ID fans are not off” and “Master fuel trip” command doesn’t exist, then a 35 second counting period is started. After it expires, the “Open All Auxiliary Air Dampers” command is removed from memory. Note :The End air Compartments present in Elevation-AA have only Dampers at 4 Corners. However, they do not have Drives and Control. These Dampers are adjusted at site and kept at that position, permanently. FUEL AIR DAMPERS : When the main fuel in an elevation, is started, the associated fuel (Coal) air dampers open and modulate as a function of Feeder Speed. A fuel (Coal) elevation is selected to be closed when the associated Feeder is off. The auxiliary elevation dampers act as fuel (oil) air dampers when oil firing is taking place and is open to a preset position. The fuel (oil) elevation dampers are selected to be closed if there is a back up trip in that elevation and adjacent pulverisers are off and “No Boiler Trip” signal is present. When an Oil Elevation is started (i.e. when the associated “Elevation back-up” trip is removed) the associated auxiliary air dampers in that elevation are set to preset position for Oil firing. The fuel air dampers of all elevations are commanded to open 100% when any one of the following conditions exist.

9 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-214


x x x x

Both FD fans are Off Both ID fans are Off Master fuel trip exists Loss of Unit +24 V DC supply in FSSS

When a Coal elevation is in service, the associated fuel air dampers modulate as a function of Feeder Speed as indicated by the associated Coal elevation “MODULATING” light coming on. When the Coal elevation is shut down, the associated fuel air dampers are closed, as indicated by a “CLOSED” light. When the “Post Trip Purge Time Expired” command is established and “Both FD and ID fans are not off” and “Master fuel trip” command doesn’t exist, the “Open upper fuel air dampers (Elevation C, D & both OFA )” command is removed from memory. Thirty seconds later, the “open lower fuel air dampers (Elevation B & A)” command is removed from memory. Fuel (coal) air damper control loop will be tripped to manual if any of the following conditions exist. x x x

Feeder rate signal failed Open fuel air damper command (From FSSS) Close fuel air damper command (From FSSS)

Priority interlocks for selection of fuel air control loop to auto is that none of the “Trip to manual ” conditions should be present. Whenever a coal elevation is started, the associated fuel air damper control loop is automatically selected to auto mode provided no trip to manual condition is present. OVER FIRE AIR DAMPERS : The over fire air dampers are positioned as a function of the boiler load. (Refer Figure-4). The lower OFA dampers start opening at 50 % boiler load and are fully open when the boiler load reaches 75 %. The upper OFA dampers start opening at 75 % boiler load and are fully open when the boiler load reaches 100 %. The over fire air dampers in two elevations (Lower and Upper) will be automatically switched to “Manual” control and then commanded to open 100%, if any one of the following conditions exist. x x x x x

Master fuel trip exists Loss of Unit +24 V DC supply in FSSS Both FD fans are Off Both ID fans are Off The wind box to furnace DP exceeds 240 mm WC.

10 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-215


All open and close commands are generated from FSSS.

----------ooOOOOoo----------

11 of 11

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-3-216

TAB - 4

GO TO INDEX

Bharat Heavy Electricals Limited

HIGH PRESSURE BOILER PLANT, TIRUCHIRAPPALLI 620 014.

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION / FB

CI:4006:SBC/ REV 00

PAGE 01 OF 06

WRITE UP ON SOOT BLOWER CONTROL SYSTEM

PUNJAB STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD GURUNANAK THERMAL POWER STATION (BHATINDA R&M) 2 X 120 MW, UNIT 3&4, CUSTOMER NO: 4006, 4007

Reference drawing numbers 1. Scheme of soot blower piping with valves, fittings and instrumentation – 2-00-047-47357 2. Basic scope drawing for SB system – 3-96-185-09451

Rev. No.

DATE

DESCRIPTION

00

06/08/2007

Initial Release

PREPARED

CHECKED

APPROVED

BHATINDA R&M SBC WRITEUP.doc

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-217

CI:4006:SBC / Rev 00 PAGE No.02 0F 06 I)

GENERAL: Various types of Soot Blowers such as Wall Blowers and Long Retractable Blowers are envisaged for the cleaning of fireside deposits from water walls, Super Heater and Economiser during operation of the boiler. Steam is used as blowing medium in all types of blowers.

II) BLOWERS AND VALVES COMING IN SB SYSTEM 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

Wall Blowers - 40 Nos: + (07 numbers future provision) Long Retractable Blowers - 18 Nos: + (08 numbers future provision) SB steam pressure control valve (pneumatic operated, controlled from SB) - 1 No. SB steam Isolation Valve (motorised, open/close command to SBMCC from SB) - 1 No. SB drain temp. control valve (24VDC solenoid operated, controlled from SB) - 2 Nos.

III) SOOT BLOWER CONTROL (SB) The SB is of Microprocessor based and built by using the Max - DNA hardware. It houses the equipments required for auto sequential operation, remote manual and local operation of soot blower and its valves. The system permits operation of any soot blowers in a sequence and permits omission of any soot blower(s) in a sequence. The blowers can be operated in groups. Only one group programme is operable at a time. The system will permit initiation of any one group programme at a time. Maximum one blower is envisaged to operate at a time in sequence from the same group. The blowers are grouped in different groups as below:i) Wall blowers - 1 Group. ii) LR blowers - 1 Group. iii) All blowers - 1 Group. The Mimic shows the individual SB operating status and the following General / Fault Conditions. Mimic will be prepared in MMI in line with scheme of shoot blowing system valves, fitting and instrumentation. In addition to the scheme, the following indication also will be included in the mimic. 1) AMBER INDICATION TO INDICATE i) 110V AC supply at SBMCC failure ii) Blower over run iii) LR Blower mechanical jamming iv) Blower steam flow low v) Blower motor overloaded vi) Boiler Trip vii) SB Steam Pressure Low viii) Auto Sequence Interrupted ix) Valve Motor overloaded 2) GREEN INDICATION TO INDICATE i) Close SB steam iso. Valve ii) Close SB Drain valve -1 iii) Close SB Drain valve -2 3) RED INDICATION TO INDICATE i) Blower operation (for each blower) ii) Auto sequence ON iii) Open SB steam iso. Valve

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-218

CI:4006:SBC / Rev 00 PAGE No.03 0F 06 iv) v)

Open SB Drain valve - 1 Open SB Drain valve - 2

4) YELLOW INDICATION TO INDICATE i) Auto sequence completed ii) Local start permit iii) All Blower at Home position iv) Blower Forwarding v) Blower Reversing vi) Blower Rotating IV) SOOT BLOWER CONTROL SYSTEM IS HAVING THE FACILITIES FOR THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS: 1) AUTO/ MANUAL MODE Provision shall be available from MMI for selecting AUTO/ MANUAL operation of soot blowers. 2) LOCAL / REMOTE SELECTION Provision is to be available from MMI for selecting soot blowers for manual operation either from LOCAL or REMOTE (MMI). If ‘LOCAL’ is selected ‘LOCAL SELECTION’ command is issued to SBMCC. 3) START PROGRAMME Provision to be available to start selected operating Programme. 4) STOP Stop command, when issued will stop the auto programme. Operating blower will retract to home position. 5) RESET Reset command, when issued will reset the fault indication, if any. Reset operation is to be made after removing the fault conditions. 6) RETRACT Retract command, can be issued by the operator to a particular blower on any abnormal condition for retracting without waiting blower to complete operation. 7) MANUAL START Any blower can be started manually from MMI, after selecting the blower and giving a manual start command. However, ‘AUTO / MANUAL selection’ has to be selected in manual position before starting the blower. 8) PROGRAMME SELECT Individual automatic blower groups have to be selected before starting the blowers in auto operation. 9) ENABLE/ DISABLE Provisions are available in MMI for enabling / disabling a particular soot blower. 10) SEQUENCE CHECK Indication of selected program sequence to be available in MMI. 11) AUXILIARY CONTROL Soot blowing steam isolating valves and pressure reducing valves is to be operated with the help of push buttons from MMI. V) SBMCC The Soot Blower Motor Control Centre consists of power supply ON/OFF Switches for incoming and individual blower/valve motors and Ammeter (A) and Voltmeter (V) with selector switch for incomer.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-219

CI:4006:SBC / Rev 00 PAGE No.04 0F 06 Each feeder is equipped with Fuses, Power ors for blower Forward/Reverse and Rotary Operation, thermal O/L Relays, aux. ors etc. VI) CHECKS BEFORE STARTING SB OPERATION 1)

Put ‘ON' 415V, 3 Ph, AC Incoming Power Supply Switch and control supply transformer switch in SBMCC. 2) Put ‘ON' Individual blower/ Valve feeder Power & Control Supply Switch in SBMCC.

VII) INITIAL CONDITIONS 1) 2) VIII) 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

SB Steam iso.valves shall be in closed condition. All the blowers shall be in Home position. SOOT BLOWER START PERMISSIVES SB isolation valve opened All blower home position Blower motor not overloaded. LR Blower jamming signal not available. SB steam pressure adequate.

IX) SEQUENTIAL OPERATION 1) 2) 3) 4) 5)

6)

7) 8) 9)

X)

Switch on Power Supply. Put Local / Remote selector in Remote position and auto/manual selector in auto position. Select the blowers, which are to be operated through each programme selection. Ensure Initial Conditions Open the respective SB Isolation Valve and allow the steam to drain. Since thermal drain valves are controlled from SB, this will modulate according to the temperature of the line automatically and keep removing condensate, if any. After attaining the required drain temperature & adequate steam pressure, press program start. The first blower will start as per selected programme and the sequence continues. Programme operating display glows to indicate the same. Blower operating indication will be available in MMI. Remote selection and sequence of operation of blowers is possible from CRT/KB in control room desk. Blower’s selection, valves operation and programme start is possible through CRT/KB in control room desk. In sequence start impulse, sequence stop impulse, sequence logic indication, individual blowers operation in a group and the mimic display for the same are to be executed through CRT/KB by the operator in control room. BLOWER OPERATION

1) WALL BLOWER: As soon as the start impulse is given, the traverse motor of Wall blower gets supply and the blower moves forward. The red lamp in mimic glows to indicate the operation of that blower. The yellow lamp for indication of ‘Blower Forward’ also glows. When the blower reaches its forward end position the traverse motor trips and the rotary motor gets supply and rotates the lance. The yellow lamp for ‘Blower rotating’ glows. Simultaneously steam valve will open and allows the steam for blowing. When the lance completes one rotation the rotary motor trips, traverse motor

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-220

CI:4006:SBC / Rev 00 PAGE No.05 0F 06 gets supply and the blower retracts. The yellow lamp glows to indicate ‘Blower Reversing'. When the blower reaches home position the mimic lamp goes off. Now the next blower in the sequence gets the pulse and start operating. 2) LONG RETRACTABLE BLOWER When the Long Retractable blower gets the pulse, first the rotary motor starts rotating. The ‘NO' of or ‘CRO' for rotary motor closes and the traverse motor starts and holds through limit switch LS-2 . The blower moves forward. The Red lamp in mimic glows to indicate blower operation. Yellow indication lamps for ‘Blower Forward' & ‘Blower rotating’ glows. When the blower reaches the forward end position, it actuates Limit switch LS1 which stops forward motion of the blower. Immediately the blower reverses. The yellow lamp for ‘Blower Retracting' glows. As soon as it comes back to home position, both traverse and rotary motors are stopped and lamps in mimic goes off. When any fault activate, the operating LR/WB blower retract automatically to the home position. The sequence will be stopped and reset light flashed. The sequence can be continued after removing the fault and resetting the controller. Fault conditions are listed below: x Blower motor overloaded. x LR Blower jamming (appl. for LR blower only) x SB steam pressure low. x Remote retract signal from SB. x SB steam flow not adequate after 3 seconds from the following conditions: ¾ Blower start for LR blower ¾ Blower rotating for wall blower When all the blowers complete operation, as sequenced in programme an indication lamp will glow to indicate “Sequence Completed” condition. SB steam main isolation valve: i) The SB motorised isolation valve shall be closed automatically when the control valve is opened less than 2% and vice versa. XI) MANUAL OPERATION FROM 1) Select Local / Remote selection for Blowers / Valves in remote and auto/ manual to manual. 2) Select the blower to be operated and give manual start command. 3) The selected blower operates and completes its operation and comes back to the home position. The respective blower operating lamp in mimic, Blower Forward / Reverse /Rotary indication comes as in the case of sequential operation. XII) MANUAL OPERATION FROM LOCAL 1) Select the Local / Remote Selector for blower and valves in local position and auto/ manual to manual. 2) The operator at field can operate any one blower by using Local Start / Retract Push Button Box. 3) The selected blower operates and completes its operation and comes back to the home position. The respective blower operating lamp in mimic, Blower Forward / Reverse /Rotary indication comes as in the case of remote operation. Operator from field cannot operate other blowers until the blower comes back to home position.

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-221

CI:4006:SBC / Rev 00 PAGE No.06 0F 06 XIII) GENERAL 1) During sequential operation / remote manual, the operating blower can be retracted by pressing the Retract Push Button. 2) The sequence can be stopped at any time by using the Stop Push Button. 3) Any blower can be byed by selecting blower and pressing disable push button. XIV) NOTE:1) At a time, only one blower can be operated. 2) CRT/KEY BOARDS ARE common for FSSS, SBC & SADC System. 3) SB operation can be made through CRT/KEY BOARD. 4) SB mimic diagram will be implemented in MMI as per “Scheme of soot blowing with valves, fittings and instrumentation”

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-222

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-223

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-224

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-225

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-226

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-227

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-228

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-229

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-230

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-231

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-232

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-233

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-234

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-235

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-236

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-237

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-238

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-239

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-240

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-241

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-242

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-243

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-244

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-245

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-4-246

GO TO INDEX

TAB - 5

GO TO INDEX

BHELVISION 20 M

BHELVISION 20 M ELECTRONIC WATER LEVEL INDICATOR Installation & Maintenace Mannual (Version II)

PUNJAB STATE ELECTRICITY BOARD

GURUNANAK THERMAL POWER STATION BHATINDA R&M, 2 x 120 MW UNITS -3&4.

DANGEROUS VOLTAGES ARE PRESENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT. GREAT CARE SHOULD BE EXCERCISED WHEN SERVICING THE EQUIPMENT AND ANY WARNING NOTICES OR PROCEDURES CONTINUED IN THIS MANUAL OR ON THE EQUIPMENT SHOULD BE STRICTLY OBSERVED

--- 1 --C:\Documents and Settings\2148277\Desktop\4006i ewli om.doc

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-247

BHELVISION 20 M

BHELVISION 20 M ELECTRONIC WATER LEVEL INDICATOR

Installation manual (Version II)

CONTENTS Section 0 Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4 Section 5 Section 6 Section 7

Do’s and Don’ts Introduction Installation Maintenance Troubleshooting Installation/part drawings Specifications Checklists

Section 0 – Do’s & Don’ts

Do

Switch off power supply before replacing any module.

Don’t

Keep the cabinet door open.

Do

Ensure proper connector seating and screws fixed at top & bottom of rack after inserting any module.

Don’t

Use a blower for cleaning the .

Do

Follow jumpering guide before inserting any module.

Don’t

Do

Return faulty module to BHEL Trichy for servicing

-

Attempt field servicing. Return faulty module to BHEL (T) for servicing. -

--- 2 --C:\Documents and Settings\2148277\Desktop\4006i ewli om.doc

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-248

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 1 – Introduction

1.0 General

1.2 Main components

The BHELVISION 20M Electronic Drum Water Level Indicator is Conductivity based water level sensing system for reliable level monitoring used in High pressure applications like steam boiler drums.

BHELVISION 20M system consists of following major sub-systems:

Traditional Visual Gauges & Differential Pressure Manometer Gauges used for Boiler Drum water level sensing suffer from the inherent measuring errors due to density difference. In addition, they require constant attention & maintenance.

‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

Pressure Vessel & Accessories Electrode Probe Ascertor Cabinet & Electronic modules Displays

The system arrangement showing the above components are given below:

BHELVISION 20 M operates on the principle of discrimination between the differing resistivities of Steam and Water at high pressure and temperature.

1.1 Salient Features An automatic choice for critical applications like boiler drum water level sensing, BHELVISION 20 M is designed with features to cater ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

Easy Installation Low & Easy Maintenance High Accuracy Reliability Built-in Fail safe features Built-in Fail operative features

Fig. 1.1.1 SYSTEM ARRANGEMENT

--- 3 ---C:\Documents and Settings\2148277\Desktop\4006i ew

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-249

BHELVISION 20 M

1.2.1 Pressure accessories

Vessel

&

1.2.2Steam / Water tapping and Isolation valves

BODY VESSEL: The pressure vessel is made up of SA105 material of thickness 115 mm. The design, fabrication and inspection of vessel will be as per IBR. The body vessel is designed for 207 Kg/Sq.cm pressure and 368 Deg.C temperature. The hydraulic test pressure for vessel is 310.5 Ks/Sq.cm. The major items for body vessel are Body, flat end cover, stub, vent / drain nipple, lifting lug, clamping plate and guard assembly. The electrode pitch is 50mm apart. Normal water level marking is provided on the vessel. A typical pressure vessel is shown in Fig 1.2.1

Each Water and Steam connections are provided with 2 Nos. of Isolation vales to isolate the Body vessel. 2 Nos. Vent and Drain valves are also provided for each body vessel. The pressure and temperature rating of these valves are same as that of drum design rating. The valves are made of carbon steel material SA105.

ELECTRODE: The electrode as shown in fig 1.2.2 consists of several sub items. To meet the specified service, the raw material is sourced carefully. The electrode body, electrode tip, body insulant & center stud are important items of an electrode. The electrode body is manufactured from martensitic stainless steel to Firth Vickers specification FV520 (B) /SA276 type 410 which has good resistance to stress corrosion and low coefficient of expansion. The center stud is manufactured from IMI titanium so that the coefficient of expansion closely matches that of electrode body. The brazing is carried out with special brazing foil in closely controlled vacuum furnace. The spiral wound SS316L graphoil filled sealing gasket is used with the electrode.

Fig.1.2.1 PRESSURE VESSEL

Fig.1.2.2 ELECTRODE


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-250

BHELVISION 20 M

1.2.3 Ascertor Cabinet The ascertor cabinet Consist of following modules and components mounting in a cabinet for 250 MW & and below rating boilers. Normally two ascertor cabinets (1 per side) are provided. The OGA of ascertor cabinet is shown in fig.1.2.3. A typical component layout arrangement of system is shown in Fig. 1.2.4 LAYOUT OF COMPONENTS Ascertor cabinet houses the following modules and components: a) Ascertor module (AS2018) 2 Nos. configured for 6 ports b) Display driver module 2 Nos. (DD2018) configured for 12 ports c) Relay driver module 1 No. configured for the required Lo alarm Lo trip setting d) Micro controller module 1 No. (MC2018) configured for 8 ports e) Linear Power Supply for 2 Nos. 230V AC f) System mother board 1 No. (MB2018) g) Power supply mother 1 No. board h) Required electrical components like MCBs, TBs etc are assembled and duly wired.

Fig. 1.2.3 OGA OF ASCERTOR CABINET

Fig. 1.2.4 LAYOUT OF COMPONENTS


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-251

BHELVISION 20 M

1.3 Ascertor Module ‰ ‰ ‰

AS 2018

Six channels per module Multilevel comparators for fault diagnostics Relays for auto simulation

1.3.1 AS2018 Operation The oscillator circuit generates & feeds an AC square wave signal of 50 Hz (approx) frequency to the electrodes. Signal output from electrode varies depending on the resistivity of medium that surrounds it (water or steam) in the pressure vessel. This output is precision rectified and compared with a presetreference to determine the medium.

Fig 1.3.1 ASCERTOR MODULE

Presence of water is ascertained if the electrode resistance falls below 100 k:(approx.). Presence of steam is ascertained only when electrode resistance rises greater than 200 k:(approx.). Between water and steam status, a hysterisis band of 100 k:(approx) accommodates the changes in medium resistance due to process variation in Pressure, Temperature, Conductivity, pH, etc. This adjustment is factory set and not recommended to change at site The AS2018 is powered from the motherboard with 12 V DC. All Input/Output connections are through motherboard.

Fig 1.3.2 AS2018 – BLOCK SCHEMATIC


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-252

BHELVISION 20 M ‘Electrode fault’ signal is generated for further processing

1.3.3 AS2018 Function blocks

A watchdog circuit generates ‘AC excitation failure fault’ (Clock fault) in case of oscillator failure.

AS2018 has six channels per module and may be programmed to select two to six channels by appropriately setting the jumpers.(See Jumper Guide) Each AS2018 provides excitation voltage through a biasing network for six Electrodes. The intelligence from these electrodes are further processed to indicate water / steam. Each individual channel consists of the following: ‰ Precision rectifier ‰ Filter ‰ Multi-level Comparator

Auto simulation drivers (Miniature relays) are present which facilitate the check of system healthiness for steam / water status, when simulated from Micro controller module MC2018 by pressing the test button provided in the remote display unit at UCB.

Precision rectifier and filter process the signal output from the electrode. The rectified filtered signal is then fed to the comparator Each comparator has a Threshold and Hysterisis. The comparator monitors the signal level and depending on the values of the electrode resistance encountered, it provides logical 0 or logical 1 output, corresponding to steam or water status All the water and steam information from this module are communicated through a common bus structure on the motherboard printed circuit to all other modules. 1.3.4 AS2018 Features Another comparator detects any Open / short fault condition of cable / Electrodes. When a fault is detected,

Fig 1.3.3 AS2018 – JUMPER SETTINGS 1.3.5 AS2018 – Jumper configuration The AS2018 module has two sets of four jumpers for selecting output signals and fault signals of individual channel. The normal configuration of these berg-stick jumpers is shown in fig 1.3.3 Note that the jumper settings are slot dependent. The appropriate jumper configuration of AS2018 modules must be ensured slot wise before powering up the system.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-253

BHELVISION 20 M

1.4 Display Driver Module ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

DD 2018

Single module for two displays No separate power source required for displays In-built protection circuit settable channel selection

1.4.1 DD2018 Operation Fig 1.4.1 DISPLAY DRIVER MODULE Ref. Fig. 1.4.2 DD2018 for block schematics. This module serves as buffer and current driver for driving the display units. Each module can cater to two display units. The Display driver DD2018 is powered from the motherboard with 12V DC. Power to the display units is derived from this module. This power supply is protected against short circuit by a current fold back circuitry. All input/output connections are through the motherboard. The DD2018 drives display LEDs Red/Green/Yellow at LOCAL and display units located at UCB based on Water / Steam / Fault information from the status bus. One module caters to two display units with a maximum of 18 ports. The number of output drives selected through jumpers can be 8, 10,12,14, 16 and 18.

Fig 1.4.2 DD2018 – BLOCK SCHEMATIC Note: Jumper setting is to ensured before powering up.

be


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-254

BHELVISION 20 M

1.4.2 DD2018 Jumper Setting The DD2018 module has ten jumpers (J1 to J10) for selecting number of display channels. The normal configuration of these berg-stick jumpers are shown in fig 1.4.3

Fig 1.4.3 DD2018 JUMPER SETTINGS


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-255

BHELVISION 20 M

1.5 Relay Driver Module ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

RD 2018

Drives trip & alarm s Individual displays for trip & alarms 2 out of 3 voting for trip generation Fault annunciation displays

1.5.1 RD2018 Operation

Fig.1.5.1 RELAY DRIVER MODULE

RD2018 receives the STEAM / WATER signals from the Ascertor through the status bus. This module provides outputs. ‰ ‰ ‰

following

Water level very high Water level very low For initiating trips and alarms

The Relay driver RD2018 is powered from motherboard with +12V DC. All Input / Output connections are through motherboard. It houses seven relays. 1.5.2 RD2018 Features RD2018 may be configured for the required Hi/Lo alarm setting. s are also given for ‰ System fault ‰ Electrode fault and ‰ Trip disable. Trip relay is actuated if any two channels vote for trip. i.e. if Nth port is connected to trip, then N+1 and N-1 ports are also considered for voting.

Fig 1.5.2 RD2018 – BLOCK SCHEMATIC LED indications are provided in the fascia plate for ‰ High Trip ‰ Low Trip ‰ High Alarm ‰ Low Alarm ‰ System Fault ‰ Electrode Fault In case of System fault, steady output is given to energies fault LED In display units whereas the same flashes in case of Electrode fault.

--- 10 ---C:\Documents and Settings\2148277\Desktop\4006i e

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-256

BHELVISION 20 M a disable mode is selected then the trip driver logic output is kept isolated and trip relays will be at ”No Trip“ condition.

System Fault consists of ‰

Any power supply failure

‰

Absence of any module

‰

Excitation ac failure

‰

Validation fault

1.5.3 RD2018 Voting

Electrode Fault consists of ‰

Electrode, cable open circuit

‰

Electrode short circuit

NOTE: Since probe fault detection is also based on the measurement of input resistance, this detection will be effective only after the water in the drum crosses a specified pressure / temperature, depending on the actual site condition like conductivity of water etc., Hence during initial boiler start up. Probe fault LED of this module may light up (and the fault LED in the display unit may flash) which will not affect any other function like steam / water detection, alarm / trip function etc., This fault indication will vanish automatically after a specified temperature / pressure at the drum is reached. In view of this, fault indication may be ignored during boiler start-up operation. Normally probe fault detection facility is not recommended. If needed this facility may be by-ed by suitable jumper connection in ascertor (AS2018) modules. A manual lockable switch is given on the fascia to Enable / Disable the trip (Low & High) functions as and when required during maintenance, testing etc.

Trip & Alarm

2 out of 3 logic is used to initiate a trip signal. If Nth (Maximum port number can be 16 -1 say 15) port is opted for High Trip then (N-1), N & (N+1) known as Steam ports have to be selected through jumpers. Similarly if nth (Minimum port number can be 1+1 say 2) port is opted for Low Trip then (n-1), n & (n+1) known as Water ports have to be selected through jumpers. When the water in the pressure vessel reaches the steam ports and any two steam ports vote for presence of water then a High Trip is generated with a time delay. Similarly when the steam in the pressure vessel reaches the water ports and any two water ports vote for presence of steam then a Low Trip is generated with time delay Alarm initiation is similar to Trip, except 2 out of 3 logic and without time delay. The port (range) selectable for Low & High alarms is between 2 & 12, selected through jumpers.

The key can be released / removed only in the trip enabled mode. When


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-257

BHELVISION 20 M

1.5.3 RD2018 Facia Indication 1.5.4 RD2018 – Alarm & Trip Values

High Trip Low Trip High Alarm Low alarm

+175 mm from NWL -175 mm from NWL +125 mm from NWL -125 mm from NWL

1.5.5 RD2018 – Jumper setting The Alarm and trip values are set in the RD2018 module at the manufacturers’ works. The settings are permanently soldered jumper configurations as per the contract requirement and should not be disturbed at Site under any circumstances.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-258

BHELVISION 20 M

1.6 Microcontroller Module

MC 2018

‰

State-of-art architecture

‰

Input signal validation

‰

In-built logic for fault detection

‰

RS 232 interface to DDC MIS

1.6.1 MC2018 Operation The Micro controller MC2018 is powered from motherboard with +12V DC. All Input / Output connections are through motherboard. MC2018 may be programmed for channels viz. 8 / 10 / 12 / 14 / 16 / 18 with jumper connection. This module does validation checks on the Electrode inputs. This module gives 4 – 20 mA DC current output corresponding to water level. Water above steam and steam below water are invalid conditions, which are detected by this module. In such case the current output is forced to 4 mA level. Once the fault is cleared, the current output will automatically go to the value determined by the level of water. RS 232 C outputs are also generated, which gives information on level of water, trip / alarm status etc. This output can be used to interface with DDCMIS. Auto simulation signal is generated to drive the relay drivers housed in the AS2018 modules. Watch dog timer circuit interrogates the U at regular intervals and flashes the ‘U OK’ LED in the front facia. This LED will be off, if U failure occurs.

Fig. 1.6.1 MICROCONTROLLER MODULE

Fig 1.6.2 MC 2018 – BLOCK SCHEMATIC


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-259

BHELVISION 20 M

1.6.2 MC 2018 – Jumper setting MC2018 may be configured for channels viz. 8 / 10 / 12 / 14 / 16 / 18 with jumper connection. The normal configuration of these berg-stick jumpers are shown in fig 1.6.3. Jumper configuration of this module must be ensured before powering up the system.

Fig 1.6.3 MC 2018 – JUMPER SETTINGS


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-260

BHELVISION 20 M

1.7 Power supply Module

PS 2018

‰

Input 230V AC +/- 10 %

‰

12 V DC regulated output

‰

Redundant failsafe configuration

‰

Auto-changeover feature

1.7.1 PS2018 Operation This Module generate 12 V DC regulated output. This regulated output feeds power to all the modules. Two such modules are used for redundancy, so that even if one power supply fails, other power supply takes over automatically & instantaneously, through Auctioneering diodes provided in Power supply motherboard. Input power supply is connected to terminals provided in the power supply motherboard. Regulated +12 V DC output is fed to the system motherboard for feeding power to various functional modules. These modular power supplies are designed to mount in a standard 19th single euro rack in the form of a plug in power supply. The AC mains input and DC outputs are provided on H15 rack connector for easy insertion of the power supply unit in the rack. The power supplies are fully enclosed with sufficient ventilation cutouts so that colling can take place with natural convection method. These power supplies are designed using approved components for highest reliability.

These power supplies are designed with appropriate de-rating of the components operating conditions so that the power supplies can still function satisfactorily. None of the component used in the module will be proprietary in nature. Regulated +12 V DC output is fed to system motherboard by these modules for feeding power to various functional modules.

Fig.1.7.1 BLOCK SCHEMATIC OF LINEAR POWER SUPPLY

Fig.1.7.2 FRONT VIEW OF PS


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-261

BHELVISION 20 M

1.8 Display Unit ‰ ‰

‰ ‰

Coloured LED displays for steam/water level status Individual display units for Local, operating floor & remote indication Test/Simulation facility for system check Compact & rugged display unit

1.8.1 Display unit Operation The Display unit is provided with a parallel array of Red and Green LEDs (12 pair of LEDs) and 1 Yellow LED arranged at the front. The number of glowing LED pair is equal to the number of electrodes. One such display unit is fixed on the Ascertor door itself for local viewing and one more display unit is supplied for mounting at UCB for each end of the drum, for the Indication system. One No. Display unit for operating floor indication is also provided. The power supply and the drive for this unit come from display driver module. 1.8.2 Display unit Test Simulation By momentarily pressing the ‘Test’ push button is given in this unit, one can quickly check the functioning of the equipment, on line.

Fig. 1.8.1 DISPLAY UNIT(Typical) corresponding to water for one second and all green LEDs should glow now. Immediately next, all simulated inputs are changed to steam so that green LEDs should switch off and now all red LEDs should glow for one second. During this period of 2 seconds test simulation TEST LED glows. During this test simulation period, trip status corresponding to pre test period is maintained. However, alarm status is not maintained. By this arrangement, on line simulation testing of BHELVISION20M system from UCB is made possible. Normally, test simulation button in Ascertor display is kept disconnected. This facility is made available only in UCB display.

During this self-test period, all the channels are given a simulated input


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-262

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 2 – Installation 2.0 General The installation procedure comprises the following activities ‰ Pressure vessel erection ‰ Ascertor cabinet installation ‰ Display unit installation ‰ Cabling & Termination ‰ Electrode installation

2.1 Pressure vessel installation

Each vessel is delivered with four isolation valves and two Drain / Vent Valves. All 12 electrode ports have blanking plugs fitted that should not be removed until later, when the electrodes are fitted. The Pressure Vessel is delivered complete with 12 electrodes and 12 Metaflex gaskets. These are fitted immediately prior to electrical pre-commissioning. It is essential that electrodes are NOT fitted until acid and steam purging has been completed. The Pressure Vessel is provided with lifting eyes at its upper end to its weight from the superstructure.

Fig.2.1.1 PRESSURE VESSEL INSTALLATION


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-263

BHELVISION 20 M

2.1.3 Vessel installation

2.1.1 Pre-erection checklist Before drawing the Pressure Vessel from store the following points must be checked. ‰ Ensure that access to work on this part of the plant is clear ‰ Ensure vessel Isolating Valves have been fitted to the steam and Water connections on the Drum and are ready to have the Pressure Vessel welded to them. ‰ Check hardware required for ing the pressure vessel are available. ‰ Ensure the location of suspention points on the super structure has been firmly ed as per site requirement. ‰ It should be noted that all ts in pipe work must be welded, tested and inspected in accordance with the standard welding procedure.

2.1.2 Vessel checklist Notify the unit operator of the intention to commission the vessel, in accordance with recognised procedures. ‰ Check that the electrode guard is in place. ‰ Close drain & vent valves. ‰ Open water and steam isolating valves nearest to boiler drum. ‰ Crack opens the isolating steam valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with the unit operator that the vessel slowly fills with condensate (about 10 -15 minutes). ‰ Crack opens the isolating water valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with unit operator that the water level is falling to approximately normal water level.

The steam and water connections on the Pressure Vessel have to be aligned in the vertical plane with the steam and water connections provided on the Boiler Drum ends and welded to those connections. The Steam and Water connections on the drum have been set to position the Pressure Vessel at the correct level when they are welded in place. However, due to the length of the connecting pipe work, these could be offset and care must be exercised to ensure that they are not allowed to take the uned weight of the vessel. Bearing this in mind, installation should commence with the attachment of the vessel s to the superstructure. The Pressure Vessel may then be attached to the s that will carry the weight of the vessel and allow it to be accurately aligned with the drum steam and water connections before and during the welding operation. After welding to the connecting pipe work and fitting drainpipe work is complete, a further check for level should be carried out and adjustments made, if necessary. NOTE: The water connection to the Pressure Vessel must be lagged. The steam connection should NOT be lagged within the last 1.5m from the Pressure Vessel. The body of the Pressure Vessel itself must NOT be lagged. When the installation of the Pressure Vessel has been completed, precautions must be taken to protect it against damage during the installation of adjacent plant equipment / pipe work etc.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-264

BHELVISION 20 M

2.2.1 checklist

Pre-installation

2.3 Display installation

Before drawing Ascertor Cabinet from store, the following points should be checked: ‰ The exact position for installation has been determined. ‰ Access to work on that part of the plant is clear. ‰ Lifting tackle and adequate suitable layout are available to raise the unit to its position at Drum Level.

2.2 Ascertor installation

cabinet

The Ascertor Cabinet is to be sited at Drum Level. Ensure by examining the internals that the correct unit is drawn from store that it is undamaged and in a suitable condition for installation to start. The unit is to be wired to the Pressure Vessel and is to be positioned so that the length of cabling connecting it to its Pressure Vessel does not exceed 15 meters (appx). The Ascertor Cabinet is provided with fixing holes in the rear vertical face for bolting it to the wall or suitable structure. Transport Ascertor Cabinet to location. Bolt and position carefully on prepared surface. Fix using bolts, nuts and washers or equivalent fastenings. When the unit has been positioned and bolted in place, adequate precautions must be taken to ensure that it is protected against accidental damage during the installation of adjacent plant / equipment and pipe work or the completion of any local building work.

The installation of the Display Unit in the Central Control Room will be carried out by other contractors, along with other UCR equipment as and when required. The display cutout details are provided on OGA of display unit drawing. The method of fitting is as follows: ‰ Remove top and bottom clamping plates by removing holding screws. ‰ Insert the display to the cut out hole in Control Room Desk or . ‰ Re-fit the clamping plates, making certain that they hold the display rigidly to the Control Desk or . ‰ Connect cable to appropriate connections.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-265

BHELVISION 20 M

2.4 Cabling

The external connection Drawing shows details of connections between the Pressure Vessel and Ascertor Cabinet at the Boiler Drum level. This wiring is to be carried out using P.T.F.E insulated, 10 pair 0.6 sq.mm special cable supplied with the system. These are terminated, at the electrode end with crimp-ring terminals and at the Ascertor Cabinet end with crimp pins. The conductors should be identified with suitably marked ferrules at each end. The cables from each electrode of the Pressure Vessel must be grouped together and laced with heat resistant lacing thread, or tie wraps, to form a loom throughout their length. The loom must be securely cleated where it leaves the vessel and shall be ed by and cleated to the perforated cable tray throughout its length to the Ascertor Cabinet. The cables from the vessels, where it enters the base of the Ascertor Cabinet, must through glands provided. The wiring within the Cabinet is run neatly and terminated as prescribed above (crimp pins).

2.5 check

Pre-commissioning

When all the installation and cabling work called for in this specification has been completed, the

commissioning engineer must be advised so that arrangements may be made for him to inspect the installation prior to precommissioning tests being carried out after the electrodes have been fitted under his supervision.

2.6 Electrode assembly Electrode assembly should be carried out immediately prior to the electrical pre-commissioning of the complete system. This consists of removing specified blanking plugs and Metaflex gaskets and replacing them with the electrodes and new Metaflex gaskets. Before starting on this work, the following points must be checked: ‰ Ensure that access to work on this part of the plant is clear and that the Pressure Vessel has been fitted and is ready to be worked on. ‰ Check that hydraulic testing, acid cleaning and steam purging have been carried out. ‰ The Vessel Isolating Valves must be CLOSED and the drain / vent valves OPENED. NOTE: - A suitable M18/M19 socket spanner is required for removal of the blanking plugs and fitting of the electrodes. This must be fitted with an extension to clear the electrical terminal end at the top of the electrode being fitted. The electrode positions on the vessel are protected by two hinged guards, which must be opened to gain access to the electrodes. Each electrode or blanking plug is held in the wall of the vessel by a clamping plate, which is secured by four M19 studs, nuts, and washers.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-266

BHELVISION 20 M

2.6 Electrode (contd.,)

assembly

When the nuts are removed, the clamping plate, blanking plug and Metaflex gasket may be withdrawn. The blanking plug and old Metaflex gasket must be discarded and replaced by the electrode and a new Metaflex gasket. The clamping plate and four washers are then replaced and the nuts assembled finger tight. Using the socket spanner, tighten the nuts progressively, a quarter turn each, until there is NO gap visible anywhere between the inside face of the Clamping Plate and the machined face of the Pressure Vessel. Care must be exercised to prevent damage to the electrode when tightening the nuts, THE MAXIMUM torque to be applied to the nuts in order to close the gap referred to be 110 Nm (80lb ft). Normally 70Nm (50lb ft) is sufficient. Refer to the instruction sheet issued with each electrode. Care should be taken when attaching the prepared PFTE cable ends to avoid mechanical damage to the electrode. NOTE: For scope and size of cable, refer “Scope And Cabling Diagram”

Fig.2.6.1 Electrode Assembly


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-267

BHELVISION 20 M

2.7 Commissioning checklist

SYSTEM DETAILS

CHECK / TEST / OBSERVATION

COMPLETE SYSTEM

Installation Visually Correct

ELECTRONICS & CABLES

System Cabling and Termination

WATER COLUMN

Verification against Drum NWL. (e.g. Clear Plastic Tube filled with coloured water)

POWER SUPPLY

Ensure power supply fuses are removed. Check for correct voltage and fuse ratings before installing fuses and switching power on.

SYSTEM TESTS DISPLAY’S

STATUS

COMMENTS / RECORD

Connect Bhelvision electrode simulator (at Ascertor ) switch all Ports to STEAM.

WATER INDICATION

Starting at Port 1, switch each Port to water until ALL WATER is shown; At each Port correct indication of level at Local, UCB & operating floor displays.

STEAM INDICATION

Starting from Port 10, switch each Port to steam until ALL STEAM is shown. At each Port correct indication of level at Local and UCB displays.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-268

BHELVISION 20 M

2.7 Commissioning checklist (contd.,) SYSTEM DETAILS FAULT ALARM


STATUS

COMMENTS / RECORD

Switch Ports to ALL STEAM Starting from Port 2, switch each Port to water to introduce a “WATER ABOVE STEAM” condition to induce the FAULT ALARM. Normalize each Port to steam to clear alarm before proceeding to next Port. At each Port, check relay fault output terminals for correct state.

LOW LEVEL ALARM

Switch Ports to indicate 50% water level (Typical NWL). Starting from the top of the indicated water level, switch each port to STEAM until the LOW LEVEL ALARM relay acts. Note Port & state in alarm condition.

LOW LEVEL TRIP

Continue to switch Ports to STEAM until the LOW LEVEL TRIP relay acts. Note Port & state in Trip condition.

HIGH LEVEL ALARAM

Switch Ports to indicate 50% water level. (Typical NWL). Continue to switch ports to WATER until the HIGH LEVEL ALARM relay acts. Note Port & s state in Trip condition.

HIGH LEVEL TRIP

Continue to switch Ports to WATER until the HIGH LEVEL TRIP relay acts. Note Port & state in Trip condition.

ANALOG OUTPUTS

Switch Ports to ALL STEAM Check output is 4mA.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-269

BHELVISION 20 M

2.7 Commissioning checklist ( contd.,) SYSTEM DETAILS


STATUS

COMMENTS / RECORD

Switch Ports 1 to 3 to indicate water. (25 % water level) Check output is 8mA. ANALOG OUTPUTS

Switch Ports 1 to 6 to indicate water. (50 % water level) Check output is 12mA. Switch Ports 1 to 9 to indicate water. (75 % water level) Check output is 16mA. Switch Ports to ALL WATER. (100 % water level) Check output is 20mA. Switch Ports to ALL WATER. Simulate Water above Steam condition (Validation fault) Check output is 4mA.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-270

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 3 – Maintenance

3.0 General

3.3 Monthly check list

So for as the valves and pipe work to the pressure vessels are concerned both regular maintenance and repair work should follow existing site practice. No regular maintenance on the vessels, or electrodes is required, except as detailed below.

Pressure vessel

3.1 Required Tools

Check the WATER pipe lagging is secure ‰ Check Vessels & STEAM pipes are NOT lagged. ‰ Blow or brush off gently any large accumulations of pulverized fuel dust or fly ash on the external insulators of the electrodes. ‰ Check that electrode connections are tight and the leads are intact. Ascertor Cabinet ‰

Tool

Purpose

Torque wrench

To tight clamping plate

Simulator

To simulate Steam/ water condition of the port

‰

Gasket Remover

To remove gasket

‰

Face Cutter

To repair damaged electrode gears

‰

3.2 Daily Check list ‰ ‰ ‰

‰

Visual Check for steam leaks at the vessel Visual check for damage to electrodes Visual check for indication in Display units at UCR, Firing floor & drum

Check all cabling for secured connection. Check all modules are in its position. Check operation of relays Check local & operating floor displays

3.4 Annual overhaul To avoid mechanical damage to the vessels, electrodes and electrode wiring due to other work, which may be required at drum level, should be protected by temporary shielding. The vessels should be drained, but need not be isolated from the cold empty drum.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-271

BHELVISION 20 M After other works has been completed and the temporary protection removed, check that no visible damage has occurred to electrodes and leads, and that the electrode connections are tight and free of dust. The drains should be closed and the isolation valves left open immediately before the hydraulic pressure test on the drum, so that the vessels with their electrodes can be included in this test. Any electrodes showing signs of leakage should be replaced immediately after this test, the vessels should again be drained until required for service (this is to prevent the accumulation of sludge in the vessels).

3.4.1 Pressure parts

With any water/steam detection gauge, even a very small leak anywhere on the detection device or its connections will cause error, as also can a partial blockage. Except for an extremely severe leak either a leak or blockage, whether on the steam or the water side of the device or its connections, will cause the detector to give incorrect readings. It should be noted that the (EWLI) BHELVISION pressure vessel thermal design is such that density errors in water level indication (due to pressure vessel water columns being at a lower temperature than boiler drum water temperature) are

reduced to less than 25mm for the temperatures and pressures specified. This is achieved by stimulating condensate (by omitting lagging on the vessel steam pipe flow in the upper part of the vessel) the heat thus released is conducted to the water column in the lower part of the vessel. The flow of condensate itself also maintains the temperature of the water column.

3.4.2 Electrode Leaks

&

Seal

The distinction between seal and electrode leaks is often difficult to determine prior to removal of the electrode, unless the leak is small. Steam wisps which appear to emanate between the outside of the electrode body and the bore of the gland clamping plate are indicative of a seal leak, whereas steam appearing through the external ceramic insulator (which is only a spacer and is not intended to be pressure resistant) suggests that the electrode itself is faulty. Even if the electrode is in water, the water temperature in an operating detection device will cause the water to flash off to steam as atmosphere is reached.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-272

BHELVISION 20 M

3.4.2 Electrode Leaks (contd.,)

&

Seal

DO NOT attempt to cure a seal leak by over tightening the gland clamping plate nuts. The base of the gland clamping plate seats on to a land in the vessel itself and the most probable fault lies in damage to the Metaflex sealing washer. The correct degree of compression on this washer is inherent in the depth of the recess below the land, which accepts the washer with the gland clamping plate seated on the land. Tightening beyond this point will only cause damage to the studs or the nuts. The correct procedure for repairing either a seal or a failed electrode is to isolate and drain the vessel. Remove the electrode lead and the knurled nut completely from the electrode, remove the gland clamping plate and remove the electrode complete with its sealing washer. Examination of these items may give a more positive identification of the cause of the leak. Unless it can definitely established however, that the electrode was not the cause, it is advisable to fit a new electrode at this stage. To assist in identification, a seal leak may be cause either by: ‰ Incorrect centering of the sealing washer on the electrode prior to its insertion in the vessel, so that it catches on the edge of the land and is distorted by

subsequent tightening of the clamping plate nuts, even if in the process it eventually enters the recess. ‰ Failure on a previous occasion to remove the old washer or all the broken parts thereof, from the recess before inserting the prevent washer and electrode. ‰ Re using an old and already previously compressed washer instead of a new one. ‰ Failing to ensure that the land and the recess were clean and undistorted. Before reinserting an electrode, check that an old washer or part of has not been wedged in the recess and that the land is not obstructed. A small Electrode with an L shaped pointed end, could be used to dislodge it by hooking the pointed end into the v - shaped groove in the gasket, NOT between the gasket and the seat. In addition, check that the gland clamping plate and studs are not distorted. If a serious “blow” occurs, immediate attention is required. Ensure that the vessel is ISOLATED AS SOON AS POSSIBLE (at least within a few hours), otherwise electrode port seat erosion may necessitate removal of the vessel. Site machining of the pressure vessel is possible and satisfactory results are usually obtained; however, it is more difficult to determine accurately the depth of the cut. When a seat is cut, the corresponding amount of metal must be removed from the face of the clamping plate flange to ensure that the gasket is correctly compressed.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-273

BHELVISION 20 M ‰

3.5 Safety Precautions ‰

‰ ‰

‰

‰ ‰

PROCEED ONLY WITH A VALID ‘PERMIT TO WORK’ Ensure that tripping is disabled and that operators expect erroneous indications or alarms. Ensure that you know the valve positions and other procedures BEFORE working on the pressure vessel. Wear industrial gloves to change electrodes. Replace convention chimney electrode covers before pressurising vessel.

After obtaining authority to isolate the vessel:

‰

‰

‰

‰

‰

3.6 Vessel Isolation

‰

‰

Close off the steam and water isolating valves nearest to pressure vessel. Close off the steam and water isolating valves nearest to boiler drum. Open drain & vent valves and proceed with work required.

3.7 Electrode replacement

Open the electrode cover guard, taking care to avoid knocking the electrodes. Remove only one electrode at a time (avoids risk of incorrect reconnection) Remove the four nuts, washers and clamping plate, extract the electrode and the gasket carefully without damage to seat face. Inspect the vessel seat, removing any remnants of old gasket and taking care not to damage the seat. Apply a high temperature, copper / lead bearing grease to the studs to reduce friction between nuts, studs and washer, so avoiding excessive loading on the studs and possible shearing. Fit a new gasket to the electrode and carefully insert into the electrode port. Ensure that the gasket is located correctly, replace the clamping plate, washers and nuts, and tighten the nuts evenly using a torque wrench until the bottom face of the clamping plate meets the corresponding face of the pressure vessel. 70Nm (50lb ft) is usually sufficient. Max. Limit 110Nm (80lb ft)Replace the electrical lead(s) and guard. Re-commission as stated below.

There is no need to switch off the EWLI - BHELVISION electronic equipment for this procedure. Carry out the isolation and draining procedure as follows:


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-274

BHELVISION 20 M

3.7.1 Vessel commissioning The method given allows the vessel to fill slowly with condensate from the steam leg through a crack Opened steam valve and for warming to continue at a controlled rate as the water is forced back through the crack opened water valve by the few inches of differential water pressure which exists when the steam valves are opened. Notify the unit operator of the intention to commission the vessel, in accordance with recognised procedures. ‰ ‰ ‰

‰

‰

‰

Check that the electrode guard is in place. Close drain & vent valves. Open water and steam isolating valves nearest to boiler drum. Crack opens the isolating steam valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with the unit operator that the vessel slowly fills with condensate (about 10 -15 minutes). Crack opens the isolating water valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with unit operator that the water level is falling to approximately normal water level. Open water valves fully.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-275

BHELVISION 20 M WATER or STEAM condition at any electrode level. The switches are numbered 1 to 18, where 1 corresponds to the lowest level electrodes and 18 to the highest level electrode. A general view of the Electrode Simulator is shown in Fig. – 3.8.2

3.8 Accessories

3.8.1

BHELVISION Simulator

Electrode

The BHELVISION Electrode Simulator (BES) can be connected to the EWLI BHELVISION – 20M equipment to simulate the working of sixteen electrodes mounted in a pressure vessel. Sixteen switches, one for each electrode, can be set individually to provide a simulated

The Eighteen switch circuits can be considered as two groups, one group comprising the ODD channel circuits, and the other the EVEN channel circuits. Each group has its own earth connection, which is common to all switches in that group. The circuit diagram for the BHELVISION Electrode Simulator (BES) is shown in Fig. 3.8.1

Fig.3.8.1 CIRCUIT DIAGRAM OF BHELVISION ELECTRODE STIMULATOR


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-276

BHELVISION 20 M Each switch circuit consists of a 2position switch (STEAM / WATER) and two resistors (1Meg ohm and 68K ohm) connected so that the resistance between the common earth and the numbered wire connection for that switch will simulate a WATER or STEAM condition, depending upon the switch setting. Connection for the BES is by means of a 3-metre long (approx). Cable with 25-pin ‘D’ connector (male) termination. In the Ascertor cabinet a set of connection from probe excitation signal at TB2 terminals 1 to 14 have been provided and terminated with 25 pin ‘D’ (female) connector.

vessel shall be isolated from process by closing water and steam isolation valves. Also empty the pressure vessel in full by opening the drain valves. Now the EWLI - BHELVISION 20M system is ready for simulation. Toggling the switches between Water and Steam position will simulate the condition of Water and Steam respectively, for individual electrodes numbered 1 to 12 from bottom to top. By operating the 12 switches (1 to 12) the following shall be simulated and tested. The Table below shows the condition applicable for a Standard 12 port system (Vision range 550mm) With Alarm / Trip levels. For this project the following port shall be switched for Alarm / Trip levels.

Fig.3.8.2ELECTRODE SIMULATOR

High Trip Low Trip High Alarm Low Alarm

10th Port Water to Steam 3rd Port Water to Steam 9th Port Water to Steam 4th Port Water to Steam

175mm 175mm 125mm 125mm

Above NWL Below NWLAbove NWL Below NWL

3.8.2 OPERATION

The BES shall be electrically linked by connecting the 25 pin ‘D’ connectors (Male and Female at BES and Ascertor cabinet respectively) together. Pressure


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-277

BHELVISION 20 M

BES SWITCH STATUS 1 to 12 - Steam

EWLI - PORT INDICATION 1 to 12 - Red

1 2 to 12 1 to 2 3 to 12 1 to 3 4 to 12 1 to 4 5 to 12 1 to 5 6 to 12 1 to 6 7 to 12 1 to 7 8 to 12 1 to 8 9 to 12 1 to 9 10 to 12 1 to 10 11 to 12 1 to 11 12 1 to 12

1 2 to 12 1 to 2 3 to 12 1 to 3 4 to 12 1 to 4 5 to 12 1 to 5 6 to 12 1 to 6 7 to 12 1 to 7 8 to 12 1 to 8 9 to 12 1 to 9 10 to 12 1 to 10 11 to 12 1 to 11 12 1 to 12

-

Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water Steam Water

Water above Steam/ Steam below Water

- Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green - Red - Green

As per individual port condition

ALARM/TRIP/ FAULT STATUS Low Alarm - Yes V.Low Trip - Yes - do - do -

ANALOG O/P in mA 4.00 5.33 6.67 8.00

- do Low Alarm - Yes

9.33

Nil

10.67

Nil

12.00

Nil

13.33

Nil

14.67

High Alarm - Yes

16.00

High Alarm - Yes V. High Trip - Yes High Alarm - Yes V. High Trip - Yes High Alarm - Yes V.High Trip - Yes Trip - Disabled Alarm - Abled Fault - Yes

18.67 18.67 20.00 4.00


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-278

BHELVISION 20 M 3.8.3.1 USING SPANNER

3.8.3Torque wrench ‰ ‰

‰

Check that the ratchet direction is correct. Select the correct size of 1/4”, 3/8” or 1/2” socket and push it onto the square. Tighten the nut until the tool ‘clicks’ and is felt to ‘give’ slightly. STOP pulling immediately.

The tool will automatically re-set itself when hand pressure is relaxed, ready for the next tightening cycle

THE

TORQUE

Torque Spanner is essential for the correct tightening of the high tensile bolts used in pressure vessel. Both over and under-tightening can cause the failure of highly stressed bolt, so they must be correctly tightened to be safe. The even tightening produced by a torque spanner used on clamping plate head studs prevents electrode damage or studs being broken. 3.8.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Setting tools fitted with a Metal Adjusting Knob a)Pull the adjusting knob out of the body tube until it clicks into position(about 6mm). It may be necessary to turn the knob silightly while pulling. b)Rotate the adjusting knob untile the cursor line lies opposite the desired torque. c)Push the metal knob back to its ‘Free Wheel’ position to avoid accidental setting alteration.

Fig.3.8.3 TORQUE WRENCH


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-279

BHELVISION 20 M

Fig. 3.8.4 OPERATING INSTRUCTION .


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-280

BHELVISION 20 M

3.8.5 ACCIDENT PREVENTION

3.8.6 DO’S AND DON’TS

A torque wrench is a precision tool for the accurate tightening of nuts and bolts. It should never be used as a lever to undo frozen nuts. When tightening or loosening a nut it is possible that something might break or slip. Always stand firmly with one foot well in front of the other and pull the torque wrench towards you. Make sure that the socket is the correct size to fit the nut and in good condition. Use an extension driver between the wrench and the socket if there is any danger of scrapping your knuckles due to a sudden release. Accidents can occur using the simplest tools. So , “BE SAFETY CONSCIOUS.”

Do set the spanner at a lower figure (3/4 of maximum) than required; tighten all nuts and re-set to final figure and tighten again. Do pull tool squarely from the center of the handle. Do refer to the maker’s handbook, or recognised repair manual for correct torque setting. Do see that bolt threads are clean and lightly oiled before torque tightening. Don’t adjust the tool either above the maximum on the scale or below the minimum. Don’t snatch the tool when tightening, a smooth continuous pull gives more accurate results. Don’t put oil through the hole in the body tube, or adjust the screw beneath it.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-281

BHELVISION 20 M

ACCESSORIES OF TORQUE WRENCH


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-282

BHELVISION 20 M

3.8.7 Face cutter The face cutter is used to repair damaged electrode port seats. Damage may occur either due to a leaking electrode gasket or due to the sealing gasket being incorrectly removed. If the leak is allowed to continue, the damage will become too severe for effective repair. Repair is possible by machining the seat to produce a clean sealing face. Positioning of the face cutter has shown in fig. 3.8.11 The following instructions enable the electrode port to be effectively repaired. ‰ Remove electrode and gasket as per the instruction briefed earlier. ‰ Whenever the electrode is changed (or) taken out for inspection, the gasket shall be replaced with a new one. The gasket can be removed with the help of gasket remover shown in fig. 3.8.7. ‰ Carefully examine the damaged seat and assess whether the damage is too severe to be remedied by site machining. This decision must be based on judgement, but as a guide, the minimum amount of metal should be removed from the seat to enable a clean seating face to be produced. The maximum that may be removed is 1.15mm. NOTE:The stated maximum, 1.15mm, is the total amount of metal that can be removed from any one seat during the lifetime of the vessel. This is not the amount than can be

removed at each machining. If it is necessary to remove more metal from a seat than this stated maximum, guidance first be sought from BHEL - TRICHY. Using a depth gauge or depth micrometer, measure the depth of the electrode port and compare it with the dimension stated in Fig. 3.8.8 NOTE: If the depth of the electrode port exceeds the dimension stated in Fig. 3.8.8 + 1.15mm, guidance must be sought from BHEL TRICHY before proceeding with the machining operation. Inspect the face cutting tool Fig. 3.8.10 to ensure that the teeth of the cutter are in good order. Attempting to machine an electrode seat using a cutter with a damaged tooth may well result in worse damage to the electrode seat. At all times during this operation, great care must be taken that the minimum amount of material is allowed to fall through the electrode port into the body of Pressure Vessel. MACHINING ‰ Insert the cutter into the electrode port with the shaft protruding outwards, ensuring that it is seated properly. ‰ Fit the guide plate over the shaft of the cutter and locate it over the four studs in the body of the vessel. ‰ Fit the nuts and washers onto the studs and tighten finger tight. ‰ Attach a spanner or socket wrench (11 mm) size to the square section, drive end, of the cutter.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-283

BHELVISION 20 M any swarf. Ensure that the swarf is removed outwardly and not into the vessel.

3.8.7 Face cutter ( contd.,) ‰

‰

Turn the cutting tool gently in a clockwise direction. As the cutter turns, a degree of “feel” is required to ensure that the cutter is making the correct depth of cut. If the four securing nuts are not sufficiently tight, the cutting face of the tool will skim across the electrode seat and not remove any metal. The nuts should then be tightened gently until it is felt that the correct cut is being made. If the four securing nuts are over tight, the cutting teeth of the tool will bite too deeply into the electrode seat and the cutter will “bind up”. In this instance, the four securing nuts should be slackened until lit is felt that the correct cut is being made.

‰

At regular intervals, the nuts, washers, guide plate and cutter should be removed and the electrode seat examined to check progress of the repair operation.

‰

If the seat is still scored, reassemble the tool and continue the operation until, when examining the seat unmarked, bright metal shows.

‰

At this point, the operation is discontinued and the electrode port thoroughly cleaned out to remove

‰

The depth of the electrode port should now be measured and the difference between this and the measurement shown in Fig. 3.8.8 must be less than 1.15mm.

‰

The difference calculated as above has now to be machined off the face of the electrode clamp plate. The clamp plate must have a raised face machined on it as shown in Fig. 3.8.9 The vessel interior must be cleaned of any foreign material by using air or by washing through with water with the drain valves open until the vessel body is clear of metal debris.

3.8.8 MARKING ASSEMBLY

AND

RE-

The electrode clamping plate and the electrode port, which have just been machined, must both be stamped with a unique identification mark. This is due to the fact that this electrode clamp plate will only provide the required seal when used in this electrode port. ‰

‰

Re-assemble the electrode into the pressure vessel, taking care to use a new Metaflex gasket. Re-commission the vessel.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-284

BHELVISION 20 M

Fig. 3.8.7 GASKET REMOVEL TOOL


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-285

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 4 – Trouble shooting 4.2 Visual Inspection

4.0 General

The visual inspection checks that will aid in trouble shooting

Trouble shooting procedure is intended to help the to identify the nature of problem from a set of defined elimination process. Also this procedure helps to eliminate minor problems such as loose s, blown fuse, blown LED etc., In case of PCB defects, it is not recommended to correct at site. Faulty PCBs may be sent to BHEL / Trichy for rectification. Faults may be diagnosed from the following flow charts and from the block diagrams. Power supply must be switched off while replacing any module. Dangerous supply voltages are present in the relay driver module ‘D’ Connector. Precautions must be observed while handling RD2018. If a module or power supply is found to be defective, it is preferable to replace it, with a new one and not to attempt local repair.

4.1 Required Tools ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰ ‰

Card extender Digital Multimeter Continuity Tester Screw driver Electrode Simulator Keys Ascertor cabinet key Trip disable keys

Pressure vessel ‰ Electrode damage ‰ Protector Hood damage ‰ Loose,Broken cables Ascertor cabinet ‰ Both PS2018 modules LED ‘ON’ ‰ Modules configuration as per legend pasted on cabinet door ‰ RD2018 LED status

4.3 Function check 1) Momentarily just press once gently and leave the test push button in display unit mounted in UCB. 2) For approx. 1 sec. all display LEDs show water (green) and all LEDs switch to steam and stay for approx. 1 sec. 3) During this period, trip relays will maintain the status prior to test function. 4) After approximate duration of 2 secs. test period, equipment goes to normal mode. 5) This facility is given only in UCB display unit. 6) This on line testing can be done whenever required to the healthiness of the equipment.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-286

BHELVISION 20 M

4.4.2 Water above Steam

4.4 Trouble shooting charts Trouble shooting Flow Charts guide the maintenance engineer to eliminate cause of trouble in a systematic manner 4.4.1 Faulty Display 4.4.3 Steam below Water

Do not attempt to work Faulty electronic modules site. Faulty PCBs may sent to BHEL / Trichy rectification.

on at be for


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-287

BHELVISION 20 M

THE EWLI-BHELVISION VESSEL AND PROBE SYSTEM PROVIDES A SELF FLUSHING FEATURE THAT PREVENTS ACCUMULATION OF DEBRIS IN THE VESSEL. THIS ELIMINATES THE NEED FOR PERIODIC BLOWING DOWN OF THE VESSEL. DO NOT BLOW DOWN THE VESSEL IF A BLOCKAGE IS SUSPECTED.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-288

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 5 – Installation/ part drawings

OGA for Ascertor cabinet

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-14787

OGA for Display unit

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-14788

OGA for operating floor indication box

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-11993

Layout of ascertor cabinet

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-15689

Internal wiring diagram

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-15688

External connection diagram

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-15687

Basic Scope and cabling Diagram

- Drg. No. 3-97-088-14457


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-289

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-290

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-291

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-292

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-293

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-294

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-295

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-296

GO TO INDEX

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 6 – Specifications 6.1 Pressure accessories

Vessel

Material Operating pressure Operating temp Steam / Water distance Probe sight range Steam / water connection Electrode pitch Material Thickness

&

Forged carbon steel, thick wall design 207 Kg/Sq.cm 450 Deg.C 635mm for 12 probes 550mm 25mm bore, butt weld 50 mm 115 mm

6.2 Displays Enclosure Degree of Protection LED Size Cutout Depth Special feature Mounting

Polycarbonate/Aluminium IP 55 HP make, highest bright, industrial grade, square type 99 (W) x 194 (H) mm 90 (W) x 184 (H) mm 79 mm Display for fault status and remote test push button for UCB display Suitable clamps for mounting provided.

6.3 Power supply Module PCB material & grade Mother board LED Indications Power connection Power supply Input / Output Load regulation Line regulation Over voltage protection Short circuit protection Mounting Indication Ambient (max)

Glass epoxy FR4, 1.6mm thick 35 Micron copper thickness Suitable to fix behind 19 inch rack Provided Thro’D-Connector cable of 0.5 Sq.mm silver coated copper Multistrand, PTFE insulated wire Linear power supply 230V AC / 12V DC @ 3.0Amp Better than + 0.2 % + 0.1 % (13.8 V DC) 120 % rated curremt Suitable for 19 inch rack Power on 55 Deg C


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-297

BHELVISION 20 M

6.4 Electrode Type Body material Tip Gasket

Flange type SS Titanium tip with ceramic insulator Spiral wound metaflex gasket

6.5 Special cable Application Specification

Interconnection between probe and ascertor cabinet 10 pair, 0.6 Sq.mm PTFE insulated, nickel plated copper, pair shielded and collective shielded, extruded.

6.6 Ascertor Cabinet Size Degree of Protection Application Operating Temp. Relative Humidity Power supply Outputs Cabinet accessories Mounting Mounting accessories

600 (W) x 600 (H) x 350 (D) mm IP 55 Outdoor 50 Deg.C 95% 230V AC Alarm / Trip s & Analogue outputs Door lock, rain canopy, earth stud & mounting plate Wall mounted Supplied


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-298

BHELVISION 20 M

Section 7 – Checklists 7.1 INSTRUCTION INSTALLATION

BEFORE

1. Visual inspection to check damages, if any. 2. Check the items received are as per shipping list 3. Ensure availability of following drawings/documents : a) Drum fittings b) Ascertor GA & Display GA c) Layout arrangement d) Interconnection detail e) Jumper details f) Scope and cabling diagram 4. Check for correct supply of UCB/Operating floor display. 5. Ensure the location of ascertor cabinet as much close as possible to pressure vessel. 7.2 CHECK LIST COMMISSIONING

BEFORE

7.3 MONTHLY CHECK LIST FOR ASCERTOR 1. Check all cabling for secured connection 2. Check all modules are in its position 3. Check operation of relays 4. Check local & operating floor displays. 7.4 VESSEL CHECKLIST

ISOLATION

After obtaining authority to isolate the vessel: 1. Close off the steam and water isolating valves nearest to pressure vessel. 2. Close off the steam and water isolating valves nearest to boiler drum. 3. Open drain & vent valves and proceed with work required.

1. Entire installation shall be checked thoroughly as per drawings. 2. Check complete interconnection as per drawing. 3. Check all terminals for secured connection. 4. Check the modules position as per rack layout arrangement. 5. Check the jumper settings as per requirement. 6. Check for correct display unit at operating floor and UCB. 7. Check the input voltage. 8. Check IR by using 500 V Megger.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-299

BHELVISION 20 M 7.5 VESSEL CHECKLIST

COMMISSIONING

1. Notify the unit operator of the intention to commission the vessel, in accordance with recognised procedures. 2. Check that the electrode guard is in place. 3. Close drain & vent valves. 4. Open water and steam isolating valves nearest to boiler drum. 5. Crack opens the isolating steam valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with the unit operator that the vessel slowly fills with condensate (about 10 -15 minutes). 6. Crack opens the isolating water valve nearest to the pressure vessel. Check with unit operator that the water level is falling to approximately normal water level. 7. Open water valves fully

7.6 TORQUE CHECKLIST

WRENCH

7.7 PLEASE ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE/DURING COMMISSIONING 1. The pressure vessel shall be mounted and ed as per DRUM FITTING drawing. 2. The pressure vessel guard assembly should not touch the electrode tip. 3. Check the cabling as per interconnection drawings 4. Check the modules position as per rack arrangement drawings. Do not change the module position. 5. Do not try to remove / replace the modules when the power is ON. 6. On line testing of equipment feature is provided from UCB mounted display unit only. Check correct installation of UCB display unit.

USAGE

1. Check that the ratchet direction is correct. 2. Select the correct size of 1/4”, 3/8” or 1/2” socket and push it onto the square. 3. Tighten the nut until the tool ‘clicks’ and is felt to ‘give’ slightly. STOP pulling immediately.


GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-5-300

TAB - 6

GO TO INDEX

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION/PE(FB) DATA SHEET FOR PNEUMATIC ACTUATOR CUST: 4006 & 4007

PREPARED : M.MURUGAPRABU

PROJECT: BHATINDA R&M

CHECKED : K. RATHNASEKAR

FILEREF: CI:BHAT :PCINDENT/00 DT: 18-Sep-10

APPROVED : S.RAMACHANDRAN

SLNO

TAGNO

APPLICATION

PGMA QTY DUTY TORQUE in kgm

LL in mm

ANGLE OF TRAVEL

COIL

RECSIZE (Bore X Stroke)

1

HFE10,20 AA101

PA A&B VANE REGN

97599

2

R

125

248

90

08"x16"

2

HFE51-54 AA101

COLD AIR DAMPER

97599

4

R

7

160

90

04"x04"

3

HFE61-64 AA101

HOT AIR DAMPER

97599

4

R

31

230

90

06"x08"

4

HLB10,20 AA101

FD-A&B VANE REGN

97599

2

R

10

200

90

04"x08"

5

HNA35 AA001

PRI. AH OUTLET

97599

1

R

151

310

90

10"x16"

6

HNA37 AA001

SEC. AH OUTLET

97599

1

R

242

350

90

12"x16"

7

HNC10,20 AA003

ID FAN INLET DAMPER

97599

2

R

175

248

90

10"x16"

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-301

Saturday, September 18, 2010

GO TO INDEX

Page 1 of 1

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-302

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-303

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-304

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-305

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-306

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-307

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-308

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-309

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-310

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-311

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-312

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-313

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-314

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-315

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-316

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-317

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-318

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-6-319

TAB - 7

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-320

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-321

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-322

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-323

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-324

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-325

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-326

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-327

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-328

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-329

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-330

GO TO INDEX

4006 & 4007 VOL D1 TAB-7-331

GO TO INDEX

Bhel Instrumentation g284r

Overview 26281t

More details 6y5l6z

Related Documents 3h463d

Bhel Instrumentation g284r

Bhel 2d696t

Bhel Questionnaire 25jg

Bhel Supercritical o4k4

Transformer Bhel 545b29

Bhel Epd 2f2m2a

More Documents from "Deepak Gupta" 5a404b

Mahendra Guru - Ibps Po, Rrb, Ibps So _ Current Affairs _ General Awareness _ Gk Booster _ General Knowledge, Current Affairs Test For Lic Aao 5mz6t

Salary Slip 5s4m4w

Sap Revenue Recognition 3n4329

Iib Tutorials 191t4s

Stratified Charged Engine Ppt v5r5n

Bhel Instrumentation g284r